You are on page 1of 426

300i

OPERATION GUIDE

Please read this Operation Guide before using this machine. Keep it close to the machine for easy reference.
Introduction
Thank you for your purchase of 300i.

This Operation Guide is intended to help you operate the machine correctly, perform routine maintenance and
take a simple troubleshooting action as necessary, so that you can always use the machine in good condition.

Please read this Operation Guide before you start using the machine, and keep it close to the machine for easy
reference.

We recommend the use of our own brand supplies. We will not be liable for any damage caused by the use of
third party supplies in this machine.

A label shown in the illustration assures that the supplies are our own brand.

In this Operation Guide, 300i is referred to as 30 ppm model.

Included Guides
The following guides are supplied with the machine. Refer to them as necessary.

Operation Guide (This Guide)


Describes how to load paper, basic copy, print and scan operations, and troubleshooting.
Safety Conventions in This Guide
The sections of this guide and parts of the machine marked with symbols are safety warnings meant to protect
the user, other individuals and surrounding objects, and ensure correct and safe usage of the machine. The
symbols and their meanings are indicated below.

WARNING: Indicates that serious injury or even death may result


from insufficient attention to or incorrect compliance with the
related points.
CAUTION: Indicates that personal injury or mechanical damage
may result from insufficient attention to or incorrect compliance
with the related points.

Symbols
The  symbol indicates that the related section includes safety warnings. Specific points of attention are
indicated inside the symbol.

.... [General warning]

.... [Warning of danger of electrical shock]

.... [Warning of high temperature]

The symbol indicates that the related section includes information on prohibited actions. Specifics of the
prohibited action are indicated inside the symbol.

.... [Warning of prohibited action]

.... [Disassembly prohibited]

The  symbol indicates that the related section includes information on actions which must be performed.
Specifics of the required action are indicated inside the symbol.

.... [Alert of required action]

.... [Remove the power plug from the outlet]

[Always connect the machine to an outlet with a ground


....
connection]

Please contact your service representative to order a replacement if the safety warnings in this Operation Guide
are illegible or if the guide itself is missing (fee required).

NOTE: An original which resembles a bank note closely may not be copied properly in some rare cases
because this machine is equipped with a counterfeiting prevention function.

i
Contents

Contents
Quick Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . vi
Caution / Warning Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ix
Installation Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . x
Precautions for Use. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xii
SAFETY OF LASER BEAM (USA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xv
Safety Instructions Regarding the Disconnection of Power (the United States) . . . . . . . . . . . . . xvii
Legal Restriction on Copying/Scanning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xix
Legal and Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxi

1 Part Names
Operation Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Machine. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4

2 Preparation before Use


Check the Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Determining the Connection Method and Preparing Cables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Connecting Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
Power On/Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Low Power Mode and Auto Low Power Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Sleep and Auto Sleep . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
Adjusting the Operation Panel Angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
Switching the Language for Display [Language]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
Setting Date and Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
Network Setup (LAN Cable Connection). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
Installing Software. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
COMMAND CENTER (Settings for E-mail). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18
Sending E-mail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19
Loading Paper. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21
Loading Originals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32

3 Basic Operation
Login/Logout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Enter key and Quick No. Search key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Touch Panel Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Original Preview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Copying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Printing - Printing from Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
Sending . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21
Confirmation Screen of Destinations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27
Specifying Destination. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28
Using Document Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31
Basic Operation for Document Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33
Canceling Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-40
Quick Setup Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-41
Program (Copying and Sending). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-44
Registering Shortcuts (Copy, Send, and Document Box Settings) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-46
Using the Internet Browser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-47

4 Copying Functions
Original Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2

ii
Contents

Paper Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4


Mixed Sized Originals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
Original Orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
Output Destination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
Combine Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
Margin/Centering Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
Border Erase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
Booklet from Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
Cover Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21
Form Overlay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22
Page Numbering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23
Memo Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25
Image Repeat/Double Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27
EcoPrint. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29
Sharpness Adjust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
Continuous Scan. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
Auto Image Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32
Negative Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32
Mirror Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33
Job Finish Notice. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34
File Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35
Priority Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35
Repeat Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-36

5 Sending Functions
Original Size Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Sending Size Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Zoom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Centering. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Mixed Sized Originals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
1-sided/2-sided Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
Original Orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
File Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
File Separation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
PDF Encryption Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
Image Quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
Adjusting Density . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17
Scan Resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18
Sharpness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19
Background Density Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20
Color / Grayscale / Black and White Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21
Continuous Scan. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22
Border Erase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23
Border Erase to Back Page. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24
Enter Document Name/File Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25
Enter E-mail Subject and Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26
WSD Scan. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27
Job Finish Notice. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29
Send and Print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30
Send and Store . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30
FTP Encrypted TX. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-31
Color Type. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-31
About Color Profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32

6 Document Box

iii
Contents

Using a Custom Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2


Using a Job Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
Printing Documents Stored in Removable USB Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-20
Saving Documents to USB Memory (Scan to USB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-22

7 Status / Job Cancel


Checking Job Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
Checking Job History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
Sending the Job Log History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
Pause and Resumption of Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13
Canceling of Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13
Priority Override for Waiting Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14
Reordering Print Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14
Checking the Remaining Amount of Toner and Paper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15
Device/Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16

8 Default Setting (System Menu)


Common Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Copy Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-25
Sending Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-28
Document Box Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-31
Printer Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-33
Printing Reports/Sending Notice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-38
Adjustment/Maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-41
Date/Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-46
Editing Destination (Address Book/Adding One Touch Keys). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-51
Internet Browser Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-58
Applications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-60
System Initialization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-63
Restarting the System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-63
Network Setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-64
Secure Protocol. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-69
Interface Block Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-72
Security Level (Security Level setting) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-73
Document Guard Setting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-73
Optional Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-75
Accessibility Display (Enlarged Touch Panel Display) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-76

9 Maintenance
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Toner Container and Waste Toner Box Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7

10 Troubleshooting
Solving Malfunctions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2
Responding to Error Messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-6
Clearing Paper Jams. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15

11 Management
User Login Administration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2
Job Accounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-14
Data Security Kit Operations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-27

Appendix
Optional Equipment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Appendix-2

iv
Contents

Character Entry Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Appendix-10


Paper. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Appendix-13
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Appendix-21
Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Appendix-27
Index. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Index-1

v
Quick Guide Be sure to read Precautions for Use before using
this machine.

Administrator tasks

To make copies To print


Simply press the Start key to make You can print via a network or print
copies. You can also fine-tune the a PDF file directly from USB
It copies. It prints.
copy settings by changing the memory.
paper size, adjusting the density,
etc.

Copying with Printing Documents Print


What specific Stored in Removable via a
you want settings USB Memory network
to do

Connecting Cables

Network Setup
(LAN Cable Connection)

Install the printer


driver on your
computer *1
Setup

Loading Paper...2-21

Placing Originals on
the Platen...2-32

Printing Printing -
Copying Functions Documents Stored Printing from
Operation
...4-1 in Removable USB Applications
Memory... 6-20 ...3-19

*1: For more information, refer to the Printer Driver User Guide.

vi
Administrator tasks

To send documents
You can send scanned images via a network. Or, you can also store scanned images in
USB memory.
It sends.

Send Send to Saving


What as Folder Documents to
you want E-mail (SMB) USB Memory
to do

Connecting Cables

Network Setup (LAN Cable Connection) Plug the USB


memory

Create a shared folder on the destination computer.

Setup
Editing Destination (Address Book/Adding
One Touch Keys)...8-51

Place the originals on the platen

Sending...3-21 *1 Saving Documents


Operation to USB Memory
Sending Functions...5-1
(Scan to USB)...6-22

*1: If the destination is not stored in the address book, you can send by entering the address
directly.

vii
Administrator tasks

To send a FAX
As well as sending a FAX via the telephone lines, you can also send a FAX via a network.
It faxes. NOTE: For more information on setting up and sending a FAX, refer to the FAX System
(S) Operation Guide.

FAX directly FAX without using the


What Send a FAX from a telephone line
you want computer (Internet FAX (i-FAX))
to do

Connect the modular cord for the


telephone line to this machine.

Selection of Telephone Line


(Inch version only)

Network Setup
(LAN Cable Connection)

Install the Network FAX


Driver on your computer *1
Setup

Using the Address Book...3-17


on the FAX System (S) Operation Guide *2

Loading Paper...2-21

FAX Operation About Network Internet Fax (i-FAX)


(Basic)...3-1 FAX...9-1 (Optional)...8-1
Operation on the FAX System (S) on the FAX System (S) on the FAX System (S)
Operation Guide Operation Guide Operation Guide

*1:For more information, refer to the Network FAX Driver Operation Guide.
*2: If the destination is not stored in the address book, you can send the FAX by entering the
address directly.

viii
Caution / Warning Labels
Caution / Warning labels have been attached to the machine at the following locations for safety purposes. Be
sufficiently careful to avoid fire or electric shock when removing a paper jam or when replacing toner.

High temperature inside. Do not


touch parts in this area, because
there is a danger of getting burned.

High temperature inside.


Do not touch parts in
this area, because
there is a danger of
getting burned.

Do not incinerate toner and toner container.


Label inside the machine
Dangerous sparks may cause burn.
(Laser radiation warning)

Moving parts inside.


May cause personal injury.
Do not touch moving parts.

NOTE: Do not remove these labels.

ix
Installation Precautions

Environment

CAUTION
Avoid placing the machine on or in locations which are unstable or not level. Such locations may cause
the machine fall down or fall over. This type of situation presents a danger of personal injury or damage
to the machine.

Avoid locations with humidity or dust and dirt. If dust or dirt become attached to the power plug, clean
the plug to avoid the danger of fire or electrical shock.

Avoid locations near radiators, heaters or other heat sources, or locations near flammable items to
avoid the danger of fire.

To keep the machine cool and facilitate changing of parts and maintenance, allow access space as
shown below. Leave adequate space, especially around the rear cover, to allow air to be properly
ventilated out of the machine.

3 15/16"
10 cm

15 3/4" 11 13/16"
40 cm 30 cm

39 3/8"
100 cm

Other precautions
The service environmental conditions are as follows:

• Temperature: 50 to 90.5 °F (10 to 32.5 °C)


• Humidity: 15 to 80%

However, adverse environmental conditions may affect the image quality.Avoid the following locations when
selecting a site for the machine.

• Avoid locations near a window or with exposure to direct sunlight.


• Avoid locations with vibrations.
• Avoid locations with drastic temperature fluctuations.

x
• Avoid locations with direct exposure to hot or cold air.
• Avoid poorly ventilated locations.

If the floor is delicate against casters, when this machine is moved after installation, the floor material may be
damaged.

During copying, some ozone is released, but the amount does not cause any ill effect to one’s health. If,
however, the machine is used over a long period of time in a poorly ventilated room or when making an
extremely large number of copies, the smell may become unpleasant. To maintain the appropriate environment
for copy work, it is suggested that the room be properly ventilated.

Power supply/Grounding the machine

WARNING

Do not use a power supply with a voltage other than that specified. Avoid multiple connections in the
same outlet. These types of situations present a danger of fire or electrical shock.

Plug the power cord securely into the mains power outlet and the power socket on the machine. A
buildup of dust around the prongs on the plug or contact between the prongs and metallic objects may
cause a fire or electric shock. Incomplete electrical contact could cause overheating and ignition.

Always connect the machine to an outlet with a ground connection to avoid the danger of fire or
electrical shock in case of an electric short. If an earth connection is not possible, contact your service
representative.

Other precautions
Connect the power plug to the closest outlet possible to the machine.

Handling of plastic bags

WARNING

Keep the plastic bags that are used with the machine away from children. The plastic may cling to their
nose and mouth causing suffocation.

xi
Precautions for Use

Cautions when using the machine

WARNING

Do not place metallic objects or containers with water (flower vases, flower pots, cups, etc.) on or near
the machine. This type of situation presents a danger of fire or electrical shock should they fall inside.

Do not remove any of the covers from the machine as there is a danger of electrical shock from high
voltage parts inside the machine.

Do not damage, break or attempt to repair the power cord. Do not place heavy objects on the cord,
pull it unnecessarily or cause any other type of damage. These types of situations present a danger
of fire or electrical shock.

Never attempt to repair or disassemble the machine or its parts as there is a danger of personal injury,
fire, electrical shock or exposure to the laser. If the laser beam escapes, there is a danger of it causing
blindness.

If the machine becomes excessively hot, smoke appears from the machine, there is an odd smell, or
any other abnormal situation occurs, there is a danger of fire or electrical shock. Turn the main power
switch off immediately, be absolutely certain to remove the power plug from the outlet and then contact
your service representative.

If anything harmful (paper clips, water, other fluids, etc.) falls into the machine, turn the main power
switch off immediately. Next, remove the power plug from the outlet to avoid the danger of fire or
electrical shock. Then contact your service representative.

Do not remove or connect the power plug with wet hands, as there is a danger of electrical shock.

Always contact your service representative for maintenance or repair of internal parts.

xii
CAUTION

Do not pull the power cord when removing it from the outlet. If the power cord is pulled, the wires may
become broken and there is a danger of fire or electrical shock. (Always grasp the power plug when
removing the power cord from the outlet.)

Always remove the power plug from the outlet when moving the machine. If the power cord is
damaged, there is a danger of fire or electrical shock.

Always hold the designated parts only when lifting or moving the machine.

If this machine will be left unused for an extended period (e.g. overnight), turn it off at the main power
switch. If the machine will not be used for an even longer period of time (e.g. vacation), remove the
power plug from the outlet as a safety precaution. If the optional Fax kit is installed, note that turning
the machine off at the main power switch disables fax transmission and reception.

For safety purposes, always remove the power plug from the outlet when performing cleaning
operations.

If dust accumulates within the machine, there is a danger of fire or other trouble. It is therefore
recommended that you consult with your service representative in regard to cleaning of internal parts.
This is particularly effective if accomplished prior to seasons of high humidity. Consult with your
service representative in regard to the cost of cleaning the internal parts of the machine.

Other precautions
Do not place heavy objects on the machine or cause other damage to the machine.

Do not open the front cover, turn off the main power switch, or pull out the power plug during copying.

When lifting or moving the machine, contact your service representative.

When moving the machine, please turn the four adjusters of the paper feeding unit until they reach the floor in
order to stabilize the machine.

Do not touch electrical parts, such as connectors or printed circuit boards. They could be damaged by static
electricity.

Do not attempt to perform any operations not explained in this guide.

Caution: Use of controls or adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified herein may
result in hazardous radiation exposure.

Do not look directly at the light from the scanning lamp as it may cause your eyes to feel tired or painful.

This machine comes equipped with an HDD (hard disk drive). Do not attempt to move the machine while the
power is still on. Since any resulting shock or vibration may cause damage to the hard disk, be sure to turn off
the power before attempting to move the machine.

In the event there is a problem with the machine’s HDD (hard disk drive), stored data may be erased. It is
recommended that important data be backed up on a PC or other media. Be also sure to store originals of
important documents separately.

xiii
Cautions when handling consumables

CAUTION

Do not attempt to incinerate the toner container or the waste toner box. Dangerous sparks may cause
burns.

Keep the toner container and the waste toner box out of the reach of children.

If toner happens to spill from the toner container or the waste toner box, avoid inhalation and ingestion,
as well as contact with your eyes and skin.

• If you do happen to inhale toner, move to a place with fresh air and gargle thoroughly with a large amount of
water. If coughing develops, contact a physician.
• If you do happen to ingest toner, rinse your mouth with water and drink 1 or 2 cups of water to dilute the
contents of your stomach. If necessary, contact a physician.
• If you do happen to get toner in your eyes, flush them thoroughly with water. If there is any remaining
tenderness, contact a physician.
• If toner does happen to get on your skin, wash with soap and water.

Do not attempt to force open or destroy the toner container or the waste toner box.

If the optional Fax kit is installed and the main power switch is off, transmitting/receiving Fax is disabled. Do not
turn off the main power switch, but press the Power key on the operation panel to enter Sleep.

Other precautions
Return the exhausted toner container and waste toner box to your dealer or service representative. The
collected toner container and waste toner box will be recycled or disposed in accordance with the relevant
regulations.

Store the machine while avoiding exposure to direct sunlight.

Store the machine in a place where the temperature stays below 40ºC while avoiding sharp changes of
temperature and humidity.

If the machine will not be used for an extended period of time, remove the paper from the cassette and the Multi
Purpose (MP) Tray, return it to its original package and reseal it.

xiv
SAFETY OF LASER BEAM (USA)

1. Safety of laser beam


This machine has been certified by the manufacturer to Class 1 level under the radiation performance standards
established by the U.S.DHHS (Department of Health and Human Services) in 1968. This indicates that the
product is safe to use during normal operation and maintenance. The laser optical system, enclosed in a
protective housing and sealed within the external covers, never permits the laser beam to escape.

2. The CDRH Act


A laser-product-related act was implemented on Aug. 2, 1976, by the Center for Devices and Radiological
Health (CDRH) of the U.S. Food and Drug Administration (FDA). This act prohibits the sale of laser products in
the U.S. without certification, and applies to laser products manufactured after Aug. 1, 1976. The label shown
below indicates compliance with the CDRH regulations and must be attached to laser products marketed in the
United States. On this machine, the label is on the right.

xv
3. Optical unit
When checking the optical unit, avoid direct exposure to the laser beam, which is invisible. Shown at below is
the label located on the cover of the optical unit.

4. Maintenance
For safety of the service personnel, follow the maintenance instructions in the other section of this manual.

5. Safety switch
The power to the laser unit is cut off when the front cover is opened.

xvi
Safety Instructions Regarding the Disconnection of Power (the United
States)
Caution: The power plug is the main isolation device! Other switches on the equipment are only functional
switches and are not suitable for isolating the equipment from the power source.

Attention: Le débranchement de la fiche secteur est le seul moyen de mettre l’appareil hors tension. Les
interrupteurs sur l’appareil ne sont que des interrupteurs de fonctionnement: ils ne mettent pas l’appareil hors
tension.

WARNING (the United States)


This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the
FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential
installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in
accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no
guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to
radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try
to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.


• Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
• Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.
• Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
• The use of a non-shielded interface cable with the referenced device is prohibited.

CAUTION — The changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.

This device complies with Part 15 of FCC Rules and RSS-Gen of IC Rules.

Operation is subject to the following two conditions; (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.

* The above warning is valid only in the United States of America.

Radio Tag Technology (the United States)


In some countries the radio tag technology used in this equipment to identify the toner container may be subject to
authorization and the use of this equipment may consequently be restricted.

MERCURY WARNING (the United States)


THE LAMP(S) INSIDE THIS PRODUCT CONTAIN MERCURY AND MUST BE RECYCLED OR DISPOSED OF
ACCORDING TO LOCAL, STATE OR FEDERAL LAWS.

Other precautions (for users in California, the United States)


This product contains a CR Coin Lithium Battery which contains Perchlorate Material - special handling may
apply. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.

xvii
Warranty (the United States)

TASKalfa 300i
MULTIFUNCTIONAL PRODUCT LIMITED WARRANTY
Kyocera Mita America, Inc. and Kyocera Mita Canada, Ltd. (both referred to as “Kyocera”) warrant
the Customer’s new Multifunctional Product (referred to as “MFP”), and the new accessories
installed with the initial installation of the MFP, against any defects in material and workmanship for
a period of one (1) year, or 300,000 copies/prints from date of installation, whichever first occurs. In
the event the MFP or an accessory is found to be defective within the warranty period, Kyocera’s
only obligation and the Customer’s exclusive remedy shall be replacement of any defective parts.
Kyocera shall have no obligation to furnish labor.

This warranty covers Maintenance Kits and the components of Maintenance Kits included with the
original MFP for a period of one year or 300,000 copies/prints, whichever first occurs. Maintenance
Kits consist of the developing unit, the drum unit, and the fixing unit. Replacement Maintenance Kits
have a 90 day Limited Warranty.

This warranty is valid only for the original retail purchaser (referred to as the “Customer”) of a new
Kyocera MFP in the United States of America or Canada, based upon the country of purchase.

In order to obtain performance of this warranty, the Customer must immediately notify the Authorized
Kyocera Dealer from whom the product was purchased. If the Kyocera Dealer is not able to provide
service, write to Kyocera at the address below for the name and address of the Authorized Kyocera
Dealer in your area, or check Kyocera’s website at http://www.kyoceramita.com.

This warranty does not cover MFPs or accessories which: (a) have become damaged due to
operator negligence, misuse, accidents, improper storage or unusual physical or electrical stress, (b)
have used parts or supplies which are not genuine Kyocera brand parts or supplies, (c) have been
installed or serviced by a technician not employed by Kyocera or an Authorized Kyocera Dealer, or
(d) have had the serial number modified, altered, or removed.

This warranty gives the Customer specific legal rights. The Customer may also have other rights,
which vary from state to state, or province to province. Neither the seller, nor any other person, is
authorized to extend the time period or expand this warranty on behalf of Kyocera.

THIS WARRANTY IS MADE IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES AND CONDITIONS,


EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, AND KYOCERA SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS ANY IMPLIED WARRANTY
OR CONDITION OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THIS
WARRANTY SHALL NOT EXTEND TO, AND KYOCERA SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR, ANY
INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES WHICH MAY ARISE OUT OF THE USE OF, OR
INABILITY TO USE, THE MFP.

xviii
Legal Restriction on Copying/Scanning
• It may be prohibited to copy/scan copyrighted material without permission of the copyright owner.
• Copying/Scanning the following items is prohibited and may be penalized by low.
It may not be limited to these items. Do not knowingly copy/scan the items that are not to be copied/
scanned.
Paper money
Bank note
Securities
Stamp
Passport
Certificate
• Local laws and regulations may prohibit or restrict copying/scanning of other items not mentioned above.

xix
xx
Legal and Safety Information

Please read this information before using your machine. This chapter provides information on
the following topics.

• Legal Information ................................................................................xxii


• Regarding Trade Names....................................................................xxiii
• Energy Saving Control Function .......................................................xxvii
• Automatic 2-Sided Copy Function ....................................................xxvii
• Paper Recycling................................................................................xxvii
• Energy Star (ENERGY STAR®) Program.........................................xxvii
• About this Operation Guide.............................................................. xxviii

xxi
Legal Information
Copying or other reproduction of all or part of this guide without the prior written consent of Kyocera Mita
Corporation is prohibited.

xxii
Regarding Trade Names
• PRESCRIBE and ECOSYS are trademarks of Kyocera Corporation.
• KPDL is a trademark of Kyocera Corporation.
• Microsoft, MS-DOS, Windows, Windows NT and Internet Explorer are registered trademarks of Microsoft
Corporation in the U.S.A. and/or other countries.
• Windows Me, Windows XP and Windows Vista are trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
• PCL is a trademark of Hewlett-Packard Company.
• Adobe Acrobat, Adobe Reader and PostScript are trademarks of Adobe Systems, Incorporated.
• Ethernet is a registered trademark of Xerox Corporation.
• Novell and NetWare are registered trademarks of Novell, Inc.
• IBM and IBM PC/AT are trademarks of International Business Machines Corporation.
• Power PC is a trademark of IBM in the U.S.A. and/or other countries.
• AppleTalk is a registered trademark of Apple Computer, Inc.
• This machine has been developed using embedded real-time operating system Tornado™ by Wind River
Systems, Inc.
• TrueType is a registered trademark of Apple Computer, Inc.
• TypeBankG-B, TypeBankM-M and Typebank-OCR are trademarks of TypeBank®.
• All European language fonts installed in this machine are used under licensing agreement with Monotype
Imaging Inc.
• Helvetica, Palatino and Times are registered trademarks of Linotype-Hell AG.
• ITC Avant Garde Gothic, ITC Bookman, ITC ZapfChancery and ITC ZapfDingbats are registered
trademarks of International Type-face Corporation.
• UFST™ MicroType® fonts by Monotype Imaging Inc. are installed in this machine.
• This machine contains the NF module developed by ACCESS Co., Ltd.
• This machine contains the software having modules developed by Independent JPEG Group.
• This product contains NetFront Browser of ACCESS CO., LTD.
• ACCESS, ACCESS logo and NetFront are trademarks or registered trademarks of ACCESS CO., LTD.in
the United States, Japan and other countries.
• © 2009 ACCESS CO., LTD. All rights reserved.
• This software is based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group.

All other brands and product names are registered trademarks or trademarks of their respective companies. The
designations ™ and ® will not be used in this Operation Guide.

xxiii
GPL
Firmware of this machine is using in part the GPL applied codes (www.fsf.org/copyleft/gpl.html). Please access
“http://www.kyoceramita.com/gpl” for more information on how to make GPL applied codes available.

Open SSL License

Copyright (c) 1998-2006 The OpenSSL Project. All rights reserved.

Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the
following conditions are met:

1 Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer.
2 Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
3 All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following
acknowledgment:
“This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit. (http:/
/www.openssl.org/)”
4 The names “OpenSSL Toolkit” and “OpenSSL Project” must not be used to endorse or promote products
derived from this software without prior written permission.
For written permission, please contact openssl-core@openssl.org.
5 Products derived from this software may not be called “OpenSSL” nor may “OpenSSL” appear in their
names without prior written permission of the OpenSSL Project.
6 Redistributions of any form whatsoever must retain the following acknowledgment: “This product includes
software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit (http://www.openssl.org/)”

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OpenSSL PROJECT “AS IS” AND ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED
WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE

IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE


DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE OpenSSL PROJECT OR ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR
ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
(INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF
USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY
OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR
OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.

xxiv
Original SSLeay License

Copyright (C) 1995-1998 Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com) All rights reserved.

This package is an SSL implementation written by Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com). The implementation was
written so as to conform with Netscapes SSL.

This library is free for commercial and non-commercial use as long as the following conditions are aheared to.
The following conditions apply to all code found in this distribution, be it the RC4, RSA, lhash, DES, etc., code;
not just the SSL code. The SSL documentation included with this distribution is covered by the same copyright
terms except that the holder is Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com).

Copyright remains Eric Young’s, and as such any Copyright notices in the code are not to be removed.

If this package is used in a product, Eric Young should be given attribution as the author of the parts of the library
used.

This can be in the form of a textual message at program startup or in documentation (online or textual) provided
with the package.

Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the
following conditions are met:

1 Redistributions of source code must retain the copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following
disclaimer.
2 Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
3 All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following
acknowledgment:
“This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com)”
The word ‘cryptographic’ can be left out if the rouines from the library being used are not cryptographic
related :-).
4 If you include any Windows specific code (or a derivative thereof) from the apps directory (application
code) you must include an acknowledgment:
“This product includes software written by Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com)”

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY ERIC YOUNG “AS IS” AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED
WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY
AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR OR
CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE
GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER
CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT
(INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS
SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.

The licence and distribution terms for any publically available version or derivative of this code cannot be
changed. i.e. this code cannot simply be copied and put under another distribution licence [including the GNU
Public Licence.]

xxv
Monotype Imaging License Agreement
1 Software shall mean the digitally encoded, machine readable, scalable outline data as encoded in a
special format as well as the UFST Software.
2 You agree to accept a non-exclusive license to use the Software to reproduce and display weights, styles
and versions of letters, numerals, characters and symbols (Typefaces) solely for your own customary
business or personal purposes at the address stated on the registration card you return to Monotype
Imaging. Under the terms of this License Agreement, you have the right to use the Fonts on up to three
printers. If you need to have access to the fonts on more than three printers, you need to acquire a multi-
user license agreement which can be obtained from Monotype Imaging. Monotype Imaging retains all
rights, title and interest to the Software and Typefaces and no rights are granted to you other than a
License to use the Software on the terms expressly set forth in this Agreement.
3 To protect proprietary rights of Monotype Imaging, you agree to maintain the Software and other
proprietary information concerning the Typefaces in strict confidence and to establish reasonable
procedures regulating access to and use of the Software and Typefaces.
4 You agree not to duplicate or copy the Software or Typefaces, except that you may make one backup
copy. You agree that any such copy shall contain the same proprietary notices as those appearing on the
original.
5 This License shall continue until the last use of the Software and Typefaces, unless sooner terminated.
This License may be terminated by Monotype Imaging if you fail to comply with the terms of this License
and such failure is not remedied within thirty (30) days after notice from Monotype Imaging. When this
License expires or is terminated, you shall either return to Monotype Imaging or destroy all copies of the
Software and Typefaces and documentation as requested.
6 You agree that you will not modify, alter, disassemble, decrypt, reverse engineer or decompile the
Software.
7 Monotype Imaging warrants that for ninety (90) days after delivery, the Software will perform in
accordance with Monotype Imaging-published specifications, and the diskette will be free from defects in
material and workmanship. Monotype Imaging does not warrant that the Software is free from all bugs,
errors and omissions.
The parties agree that all other warranties, expressed or implied, including warranties of fitness for a
particular purpose and merchantability, are excluded.
8 Your exclusive remedy and the sole liability of Monotype Imaging in connection with the Software and
Typefaces is repair or replacement of defective parts, upon their return to Monotype Imaging.
In no event will Monotype Imaging be liable for lost profits, lost data, or any other incidental or
consequential damages, or any damages caused by abuse or misapplication of the Software and
Typefaces.
9 Massachusetts U.S.A. law governs this Agreement.
10 You shall not sublicense, sell, lease, or otherwise transfer the Software and/or Typefaces without the prior
written consent of Monotype Imaging.
11 Use, duplication or disclosure by the Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in the Rights in
Technical Data and Computer Software clause at FAR 252-227-7013, subdivision (b)(3)(ii) or
subparagraph (c)(1)(ii), as appropriate. Further use, duplication or disclosure is subject to restrictions
applicable to restricted rights software as set forth in FAR 52.227-19 (c)(2).
12 You acknowledge that you have read this Agreement, understand it, and agree to be bound by its terms
and conditions. Neither party shall be bound by any statement or representation not contained in this
Agreement. No change in this Agreement is effective unless written and signed by properly authorized
representatives of each party. By opening this diskette package, you agree to accept the terms and
conditions of this Agreement.

xxvi
Energy Saving Control Function
The device comes equipped with a Low Power Mode where energy consumption is reduced after a certain
amount of time elapses since the device was last used, as well as a Sleep where printer and fax functions
remain in a waiting state but power consumption is still reduced to a minimum when there is no activity with the
device within a set amount of time.

Low Power Mode


The device automatically enters Low Power Mode when 1 minute have passed since the device was last used.
The amount of time of no activity that must pass before Low Power Mode is activated may be lengthened. For
more information refer to Low Power Mode and Auto Low Power Mode on page 2-9.

Sleep
The device automatically enters Sleep when 15 minutes have passed since the device was last used. The
amount of time of no activity that must pass before Sleep is activated may be lengthened. For more information
see Sleep and Auto Sleep on page 2-10.

Automatic 2-Sided Copy Function


This device includes 2-sided copying as a standard function. For example, by copying two 1-sided originals onto
a single sheet of paper as a 2-sided copy, it is possible to lower the amount of paper used. For more information
see Duplex Copying on page 3-11.

Paper Recycling
This device supports the recycled paper which reduces the load on the environment. Your sales or service
representative can provide information about recommended paper types.

Energy Star (ENERGY STAR®) Program


We have determined as a participating company in the International Energy Star Program that
this product is compliant with the standards laid out in the International Energy Star Program.

xxvii
About this Operation Guide
This Operation Guide contains the following chapters.

Chapter 1 - Part Names


Identifies machine parts and operation panel keys.

Chapter 2 - Preparation before Use


Explains adding paper, placing originals, connecting the machine, and necessary configurations before first use.

Chapter 3 - Basic Operation


Describes the procedures for basic copying, printing and scanning.

Chapter 4 - Copying Functions


Describes the functions you can use when copying.

Chapter 5 - Sending Functions


Describes the functions you can use when sending originals.

Chapter 6 - Document Box


Provides a basic guide to using document boxes.

Chapter 7 - Status / Job Cancel


Explains how to check the job status and job history and how to cancel jobs being printed or waiting to print.
Also explains how to check the remaining paper and device status and how to cancel fax transmission

Chapter 8 - Default Setting (System Menu)


Describes the System Menu options for general machine operation.

Chapter 9 - Maintenance
Describes cleaning and toner replacement.

Chapter 10 - Troubleshooting
Explains how to handle error messages, paper jams and other problems.

Chapter 11 - Management
Explains user login administration and job accounting.

Appendix
Explains how to enter characters, and lists the machine specifications.
Introduces the convenient optional equipment available for this machine.
Provides information on media types and paper sizes. Also includes a glossary of terms.

xxviii
Conventions in This Guide
The following conventions are used depending on the nature of the description.

Convention Description Example

Bold Indicates the operation panel Press the Start key.


keys or a computer screen.

[Regular] Indicates the touch panel keys. Press [OK].

Italic Indicates a message displayed Ready to copy is displayed.


on the touch panel.

Used to emphasize a key word, For more information refer to Sleep and
phrase or references to Auto Sleep on page 2-9.
additional information.

Note Indicates supplemental


information or operations for NOTE:
reference.

Important Indicates items that are required


or prohibited so as to avoid IMPORTANT:
problems.

Caution Indicates what must be


observed to prevent injury or
CAUTION:
machine breakdown and how to
deal with it.

Description of Operation Procedure


In this Operation Guide, continuous operation of the keys on the touch panel is as follows:

Description in this
Actual procedure
Operation Guide

Press [Copy]. Press [Copy], [Next] of Quick


 Setup, [ ] twice, and then
Press [Next] of Quick Setup. [Change] of Original Image.

Press [ ] twice.

Press [Change] of Original Image.

xxix
Originals and Paper Sizes
This section explains the notation used in this guide when referring to sizes of originals or paper sizes.

As with A4, B5 and Letter, which may be used either in the horizontal or vertical direction, horizontal direction is
indicated by an additional letter R in order to indicate the orientation of the original/paper.

Placement direction Indicated size *

Vertical direction A4, B5, A5, B6,


B B A6, 16K, Letter,
Statement

A A

Original Paper

For the originals/paper, dimension A is longer


than B.

Horizontal direction A4-R, B5-R, A5-R,


B B B6-R, A6-R, 16K-
R, Letter-R,
Statement-R
A
A

Original Paper

For the originals/paper, dimension A is shorter


than B.
* The size of the original/paper that can be used depends on the
function and source tray. For further details, refer to the page
detailing that function or source tray.

Icons on the Touch Panel


The following icons are used to indicate originals and paper placement directions on the touch panel.

Placement direction Originals Paper

Vertical direction

Horizontal direction

xxx
1 Part Names

This chapter identifies the machine parts and operation panel keys.

• Operation Panel ..................................................................................1-2


• Machine ..............................................................................................1-4

1-1
Part Names

Operation Panel

Displays the Status/Job Cancel screen.


Displays the System Menu.
Displays number of sheets printed and
number of pages scanned.
Blinks during printing operation.

Blinks while data is transmitted.


Blinks while data is received.

Displays the Copy screen.

Displays the screen for sending.You can also change


this to show the address book screen.

Switches the touch panel display to enlarged display


in the Copy screen or Send screen.

Displays the Document Box screen.


Displays help guidance.
Displays the Application screen.
Displays the Program screen.

1-2
Part Names

Blinks while the machine is accessing the hard disk,fax memory or 1


USB memory (general-purpose item).
Lights or blinks when an error occurs and
a job is stopped.
Displays the Interrupt Copy screen.
Ends operation (logs out) on
the Administration screen.
Puts the machine into
Low Power Mode.
Puts the machine into Sleep Mode.
Recovers from Sleep if in Sleep Mode.

Lit when the machine's


main power is on.

Returns settings to
their default states.

Cancels or pauses
the printing job
in progress.

Starts copying and scanning operations


and processing for setting operations.

Finalizes numeric key entry, and finalizes


screen during setting of functions. Operates
linked with the on-screen [OK].

Recalls already registered destinations and


programs for sending.
Clears entered numbers and characters.
Numeric keys.Enter numbers and symbols

1-3
Part Names

Machine
1 3

2 11
12
4

5
6

15

13

14

7 9 10 8

1 Original Cover (Option)


2 Original Size Indicator Plates
3 Clip Holder
4 Slit Glass
5 Attention Indicator... Lights or blinks when an error occurs and a job is stopped
6 Receive Indicator... Blinks while data is received
7 Left Cover 1
8 Left Cover 1 Lever
9 Left Cover 2
10 Left cover 2 Handle
11 Platen
12 Operation Panel
13 Cassette 1
14 Cassette 2
15 Duplex Unit

1-4
Part Names

17 16
1

22

18

23

21

19

20

16 Toner Container Stopper


17 Toner Container
18 Waste Toner Box
19 Paper Feed Unit (A2)
20 Paper Feed Unit Cover (A3)
21 Green Knob
22 Cleaner Rod
23 Cleaning Brush

1-5
Part Names

24

34

38

35
37
25 28
36
32

30
29
31

33

26 31 27
24 USB Memory Slot (A1)
25 Front Cover
26 Paper Width Adjusting Tab
27 Paper Length Guide
28 Top Tray
29 Main Power Switch
30 Paper Width Guide
31 Multi Purpose Tray
32 Output Stopper
33 Filter (F1)
34 Option Interface Slot (OPT2)
35 USB Memory Slot (A2)
36 USB Interface Connector (B1)
37 Network Interface Connector
38 Option Interface Slot (OPT1)

1-6
2 Preparation before Use

This chapter explains the preparations before using this equipment for the first time as well
as the procedures for loading paper and originals.

• Check the Accessories .......................................................................2-2


• Determining the Connection Method and Preparing Cables...............2-3
• Connecting Cables..............................................................................2-5
• Power On/Off ......................................................................................2-7
• Low Power Mode and Auto Low Power Mode ....................................2-9
• Sleep and Auto Sleep .......................................................................2-10
• Adjusting the Operation Panel Angle ................................................2-11
• Switching the Language for Display [Language]...............................2-11
• Setting Date and Time ......................................................................2-12
• Network Setup (LAN Cable Connection) ..........................................2-14
• Installing Software.............................................................................2-17
• COMMAND CENTER (Settings for E-mail) ......................................2-18
• Sending E-mail..................................................................................2-19
• Loading Paper...................................................................................2-21
• Loading Originals ..............................................................................2-32

2-1
Preparation before Use

Check the Accessories


Check that the following accessories are included.

• Operation Guide (This Guide)


• CD-ROM (Product Library)

Documents Contained in the Included CD-ROM


The following documents are contained in the included CD-ROM (Product Library). Refer to them as necessary.

Documents

KYOCERA COMMAND CENTER Operation Guide

Printer Driver User Guide

Network FAX Driver Operation Guide

TWAIN/WIA Driver Operation Guide

KM-NET for Direct Printing Operation Guide

KMnet Viewer User Guide

Scan to SMB (PC) Setup Guide

PRESCRIBE Commands Technical Reference

PRESCRIBE Commands Command Reference

Data Security Kit (E) Operation Guide

FAX System (S) Operation Guide

2-2
Preparation before Use

Determining the Connection Method and Preparing Cables


Check the method to connect the equipment to a PC or network, and prepare the necessary cables.

Connection Example 2
Determine the method to connect the equipment to a PC or network by referring to the illustration below.

Connecting a scanner to your PC network with a network


cable (100BASE-TX or 10BASE-T)

COMMAND CENTER
Network Send E-mail
Administrator’s
PC Network settings, Scanner
default settings, User and Sends the image data
destination registration of scanned originals to
the desired recipient
as a file attached to an
E-mail message.
MFP
Printing

Network
Send SMB
USB
Saves the scanned
image as a data file on
your PC.
Network

Network FAX Network Network


(Option) Send FTP

Sends the scanned


image as a data file on
the FTP.

FAX TWAIN Scanning


FAX (Option)
Network

WIA Scanning

Network TWAIN and WIA are


standardized interface
for communication
between software
applications and image
acquisition devices.

2-3
Preparation before Use

Preparing Necessary Cables


The following interfaces are available to connect the equipment to a PC. Prepare the necessary cables
according to the interface you use.

Available Standard Interfaces

Function Interface Necessary Cable

Printer/Scanner Network interface LAN (10Base-T or


/Network FAX* 100Base-TX, Shielded)

Printer USB interface USB2.0 compatible cable


(Hi-Speed USB compliant,
Max. 5.0 m, Shielded)
* Function available when using optional fax kit. For details on
Network FAX, refer to the Fax Kit Operation Guide.

2-4
Preparation before Use

Connecting Cables

Connecting LAN Cable (Optional)


Follow the steps below to connect a LAN cable to the machine. 2
1 When the machine is powered up, first press the
Power key on the operation panel. Check that the
Power indicator and the memory indicator are off.
After this, turn off the main power switch.

Check that
the indicators
are off.

2 Connect the LAN cable to the network interface


located on right side of the body.

3 Connect the other end of the cable to the hub.

4 Configure the network. For details, refer to Network


Setup (LAN Cable Connection) on page 2-14.

2-5
Preparation before Use

Connecting USB Cable


Follow the steps below to connect a USB cable to the machine.

1 When the machine is powered up, first press the


Power key on the operation panel. Check that the
Power indicator and the memory indicator are off.
After this, turn off the main power switch.

Check that
the indicators
are off.

2 Connect the USB cable to the appropriate interface


located on the right side of the body.

3 Connect the other end of the cable to the PC.

Connecting the Power Cable


Connect one end of the supplied power cable to the machine and the other end to a power outlet.

IMPORTANT: Only use the power cable that comes with the machine.

2-6
Preparation before Use

Power On/Off

Power On

When the main power indicator is lit... 2


Press the Power key.

When the main power indicator is off...


Open the main power switch cover and turn the main
power switch on.

NOTE: If the optional Data Security Kit is installed, a message might display indicating the security function is
being activated and time may be taken to start up when the power is turned on.

IMPORTANT: When turning off the main power switch, do not turn on the main power switch again immediately.
Wait more than 5 seconds, and then turn on the main power switch.

2-7
Preparation before Use

Power Off
Before turning off the main power switch, press the Power key on the operation panel to off. Make sure that the
Power key and the memory indicator are off before turning off the main power switch.

CAUTION: The hard disk may be operating when the Power key or Memory indicator is lit or blinking. Turning
off the main power switch while the hard disk is operating may cause damage.

Make sure
that the
indicators
are off.

In case of not using the machine for an extended period of time

CAUTION: If this machine will be left unused for an extended period (e.g. overnight), turn it off at the
main power switch. If the machine will not be used for an even longer period of time (e.g. vacation),
remove the power plug from the outlet as a safety precaution. If the optional Fax kit is installed, note that
turning the machine off at the main power switch disables fax transmission and reception.

CAUTION: Remove paper from the cassettes and seal it in the paper storage bag to protect it from humidity.

2-8
Preparation before Use

Low Power Mode and Auto Low Power Mode


Low Power Mode

To activate Low Power Mode, press the Energy Saver key. Touch panel and all indicators on the operation
panel will go out to save power except the Energy Saver, Power, and main power indicators. This status is
2
referred to as Low Power Mode.

If print data is received during Low Power Mode, the machine automatically wakes up and starts printing.
Also when fax data arrives while the machine is in Low Power Mode when using the optional fax, the machine
automatically wakes up and starts printing.

To resume, perform one of the following actions. The machine will be ready to operate within 10 seconds.

• Press any key on the operation panel.


• Open the original cover or the optional document
processor.
• Place originals in the optional document processor.

Note that ambient environmental conditions, such as


ventilation, may cause the machine to respond more
slowly.

Auto Low Power Mode

Auto Low Power Mode automatically switches the machine into Low Power Mode if left idle for a preset time.
The default preset time is 1 minute.

2-9
Preparation before Use

Sleep and Auto Sleep


Sleep
To enter Sleep, press the Power key. Touch panel and
all indicators on the operation panel will go out to save
a maximum amount of power except the Main Power
indicator. This status is referred to as Sleep.

If print data is received during Sleep, the print job is


performed while the touch panel remains unlit.

When using the optional fax, received fax data is printed


out while the operation panel also remains unlit.

To resume, press the Power key. The machine will be


ready within 15 seconds.

Note that ambient environmental conditions, such as


ventilation, may cause the machine to respond more
slowly.

Auto Sleep

Auto Sleep automatically switches the machine into Sleep if left idle for a preset time. The default preset time is
15 minutes.

2-10
Preparation before Use

Adjusting the Operation Panel Angle


Adjust the angle of the operation panel in two as shown
by releasing the operation panel lock lever.
2

Switching the Language for Display [Language]


Select the language displayed on the touch panel.

Use the procedure below to select the language.

1 Press the System Menu key.

2 Press [Common Settings] and then [Change] of


Language.

Common Settings - Language 3 Press the key for the language you want to use.
Set the language to use for the touch panel display.

English Deutsch Français Español Italiano

Nederlands ǸțșșȒȐȑ Português

Cancel OK

Status 08/08/2009 10:10

4 Press [OK].

The touch panel language will be changed.

2-11
Preparation before Use

Setting Date and Time


Follow the steps below to set the local date and time at the place of installation.

When you send an E-mail using the transmission function, the date and time as set here will be printed in the
header of the E-mail message. Set the date, time and time difference from GMT of the region where the machine
is used.

NOTE: If user login administration is enabled, you can only change the settings by logging in with
administrator privileges. If user login administration is disabled, the user authentication screen appears. Enter
a login user name and password, and press [Login]. Refer to Adding a User on page 11-5 for the default login
user name and password.
Be sure to set the time difference before setting the date and time.

If you change Date/Time setting, trial functions will be unavailable. For details, refer to Optional Functions on
page 8-75.

1 Press the System Menu key.

2 Press [ ], [Date/Timer] and then [Change] of


Time Zone.

Date/Timer - Time Zone


3 Select the region.
Set time zone.
Select the location nearest you.

Time Zone
NOTE: Press [ ] or [ ] to view the next region.
-12:00 International Date Line West

-11:00 Midway Island, Samoa

-10:00 Hawaii
4 Press [Off] or [On] of Summer Time and press [OK].
Summer Time
1/13
-09:00 Alaska Off

-08:00 Pacific Time (US & Canada)


On NOTE: If you select a region that does not utilize
-07:00 Arizona
summer time, the summer time setting screen will not
Cancel OK appear.
Status 08/08/2009 10:10

5 Press [Change] of Date/Time.

2-12
Preparation before Use

Date/Timer - Date/Time
6 Set the date and time. Press [+] or [–] in each
Set the date and time.
setting.

7 Press [OK].
2008 Year 10 Month 10 Day 2
Off
10 Hour 10 Minute 31 Second

Cancel OK

Status 08/08/2009 10:10

2-13
Preparation before Use

Network Setup (LAN Cable Connection)


The machine is equipped with network interface, which is compatible with network protocols such as TCP/IP
(IPv4), TCP/IP (IPv6), IPX/SPX, NetBEUI, IPSec, and AppleTalk. It enables network printing on the Windows,
Macintosh, UNIX, NetWare and other platforms.

This section explains the TCP/IP (IPv4) Setup and AppleTalk Setup procedures. For other network settings,
refer to the Network Setup on 8-64.

• TCP/IP (IPv4) Setup...2-14


• AppleTalk Setup...2-16

NOTE: If user login administration is enabled, you can only change the settings by logging in with
administrator privileges. If user login administration is disabled, the user authentication screen appears. Enter
a login user name and password, and press [Login]. Refer to Adding a User on page 11-5 for the default login
user name and password.

TCP/IP (IPv4) Setup (by Entering IP Addresses)


Set up TCP/IP to connect to the Windows network. Set the IP addresses, subnet masks, and gateway
addresses. The default settings are "TCP/IP Protocol: On, DHCP: On, Bonjour: Off, Auto-IP: On".

NOTE: Prior to the IP address entries, obtain permission from the network administrator.

Use the procedure below.

1 Press the System Menu key.

2 Press [System], [Next] of Network and then [Next]


of TCP/IP Setting.

3 Press [Change] of TCP/IP.

4 Press [On] and then press [OK].

5 Press [Change] of IPv4.

System - IPv4
6 Press [DHCP].
Set TCP/IP (IPv4).

IP Address 0.0.0.0

Subnet Mask 0.0.0.0


On

Default
Gateway 0.0.0.0

On Off On

DHCP Bonjour Auto-IP

Cancel OK

Status 08/08/2009 10:10

7 Press [Off] of DHCP and then press [OK].

8 Press [Bonjour].

2-14
Preparation before Use

9 Press [Off] of Bonjour and then press [OK].

10 Press [IP Address] and enter the address using the


numeric keys.

11 Press [Subnet Mask] and enter the address using 2


the numeric keys.

12 Press [Default Gateway] and enter the address


using the numeric keys.

13 Check if all the address entries are correct and


press [OK].

14 After changing the setting, restart the system or


turn the machine OFF and then ON again.

For detailed information on restarting the system,


refer to Restarting the System on page 8-63.

DHCP Settings

Select whether or not to use the DHCP server. The default setting is On.

Use the procedure below.

1 Press the System Menu key.

2 Press [System], [Next] of Network and then [Next]


of TCP/IP Setting.

3 Press [Change] of TCP/IP.

4 Press [On] and then press [OK].

5 Press [Change] of IPv4.

6 Press [DHCP].

7 Press [On] or [Off] of DHCP and then press [OK].

8 After changing the setting, restart the system or


turn the machine OFF and then ON again.

For detailed information on restarting the system,


refer to Restarting the System on page 8-63.

Bonjour Settings

Select whether or not to use Bonjour. The default setting is Off.

Use the procedure below.

1 Press the System Menu key.

2 Press [System], [Next] of Network and then [Next]


of TCP/IP Setting.

2-15
Preparation before Use

3 Press [Change] of TCP/IP.

4 Press [On] and then press [OK].

5 Press [Change] of IPv4.

6 Press [Bonjour].

7 Press [On] or [Off] of Bonjour and then press [OK].

8 After changing the setting, restart the system or


turn the machine OFF and then ON again.

For detailed information on restarting the system,


refer to Restarting the System on page 8-63.

Auto-IP Settings

Select whether or not to use Auto-IP. The default setting is On.

Use the procedure below.

1 Press the System Menu key.

2 Press [System], [Next] of Network and then [Next]


of TCP/IP Setting.

3 Press [Change] of TCP/IP.

4 Press [On] and then press [OK].

5 Press [Change] of IPv4.

6 Press [Auto-IP].

7 Press [On] or [Off] of Auto-IP and then press [OK].

8 After changing the setting, restart the system or


turn the machine OFF and then ON again.

For detailed information on restarting the system,


refer to Restarting the System on page 8-63.

AppleTalk Setup
Select the Apple Talk network connection. The default setting is On.

Use the procedure below.

1 Press the System Menu key.

2 Press [System], [Next] of Network and then


[Change] of AppleTalk.

3 Press [On] or [Off].

2-16
Preparation before Use

4 Press [OK].

5 After changing the setting, restart the system or


turn the machine OFF and then ON again.

For detailed information on restarting the system, 2


refer to Restarting the System on page 8-63.

Installing Software
Install appropriate software on your PC from the included Product Library CD-ROM (Product Library) if you want
to use the printer function of this machine or perform TWAIN / WIA transmission or FAX transmission from your
PC.

NOTE: Installation on Windows XP, Windows 2000, Server 2003 and Windows Vista must be done by a user
logged on with administrator privileges.
Plug and Play is disabled on this device when in Sleep. Wake the device from Sleep before continuing. See
Sleep and Auto Sleep on page 2-10.

2-17
Preparation before Use

COMMAND CENTER (Settings for E-mail)


COMMAND CENTER is a tool used for tasks such as verifying the operating status of the machine and changing
the settings for security, network printing, E-mail transmission and advanced networking.

NOTE: Here, information on the FAX settings has been omitted. For more information on using the FAX, refer
to the Fax Kit Operation Guide.

The procedure for accessing COMMAND CENTER is explained below.

1 Launch your Web browser.

2 In the Address or Location bar, enter the machine’s IP address.

E.g.) http://192.168.48.21/

The web page displays basic information about the machine and COMMAND CENTER as well as their
current status.

3 Select a category from the navigation bar on the left of the screen. The values for each category must be
set separately.

If restrictions have been set for COMMAND CENTER, enter the correct user name and password to access
pages other than the startup page.

For details, refer to the KYOCERA COMMAND CENTER Operation Guide.

2-18
Preparation before Use

Sending E-mail
Specifying the SMTP settings allows you to send images loaded onto this machine as E-mail attachments.

To use this function, this machine must be connected to a mail server using the SMTP protocol.
2
Before sending images loaded onto this machine as E-mail attachments, check the following:

• The network environment used to connect this machine to the mail server
A full-time connection via a LAN is recommended.
• SMTP Settings
Use COMMAND CENTER to register the IP address or host name of the SMTP server.
• If limits have been set on the size of E-mail messages, it may not be possible to send very large E-mails.

The procedure for specifying the SMTP settings is explained below.

1 Click Advanced -> SMTP -> General.

2-19
Preparation before Use

2 Enter the correct settings in each field.

The settings to be specified in the SMTP settings screen are shown below.

Item Description

SMTP Protocol Enables or disables SMTP protocol. To use E-mail, this protocol must be
enabled.

SMTP Port Number Set the SMTP Port Number or use the SMTP default port 25.

SMTP Server Name Enter the SMTP server IP address or its name. The maximum length of the
SMTP server name and IP address is 64 characters. If entering the name, a DNS
server address must also be configured. The DNS server address may be
entered on the TCP/IP General tab.

SMTP Server Timeout Set the amount of time to wait before time-out in seconds.

Authentication Enables or disables the SMTP authentication protocol or sets POP before SMTP
Protocol as the protocol. The SMTP authentication supports Microsoft Exchange 2000.

Authenticate as Authentication can be set from three POP3 accounts or you can choose a
different account.

Login User Name When Other is selected for Authenticate, the login user name set here will be
used for SMTP authentication. The maximum length of the login user name is
64 characters.

Login Password When Other is selected for Authenticate, the password set here will be used for
authentication. The maximum length of the login password is 64 characters.

POP before SMTP Set the amount of time to wait before time-out in seconds when you have
Timeout selected POP before SMTP as the Authentication Protocol.

Test This will test if the SMTP connection can be successfully established.

E-mail Size Limit Enter the maximum size of E-mail that can be sent in kilobytes. When the value is
0, the limitation for E-mail size is disabled.

Sender Address Enter the E-mail address of the person responsible for the machine, such as the
machine administrator, so that a reply or non-delivery report will go to a person
rather than to the machine. The sender address must be entered correctly for
SMTP authentication. The maximum length of the sender address is
128 characters.

Signature Enter the signature. The signature is free form text that will appear at the end of
the E-mail body. It is often used for further identification of the machine. The
maximum length of the signature is 512 characters.

Domain Restriction Enter the domain names that can be permitted or rejected. The maximum length
of the domain name is 32 characters. You can also specify E-mail addresses.

3 Click Submit.

2-20
Preparation before Use

Loading Paper
Paper can be loaded standardly in the two cassettes and the multi purpose tray. A paper feeder is also available
as an option (refer to Optional Equipment on Appendix-2).
2
Before Loading Paper
When you open a new package of paper, fan the sheets
to separate them slightly prior to loading in the following
steps.

1 Bend the whole set of sheets to swell them in the


middle.

2 Hold the stack at both ends and stretch it while


keeping the entire stack risen.

3 Raise the right and left hands alternately to create


a gap and feed air between the paper.

4 Finally, align the paper on a level, flat table.

If the paper is curled or folded, straighten it before


loading. Paper that is curled or folded may cause a
jam.

CAUTION: If you copy onto used paper (paper already


used for copying), do not use paper that is stapled or
clipped together. This may damage the machine or
cause poor image quality.

NOTE: If printouts are curled or not neatly stapled,


turn the stack in the cassette upside down.

Avoid exposing opened paper to high temperatures


and high humidity as dampness can be a cause of
problems. Seal any remaining paper after loading
in the multi purpose tray or cassettes back in the
paper storage bag.

If the machine will not be used for a prolonged


period, protect all paper from humidity by removing
it from the cassettes and sealing it in the paper
storage bag.

NOTE: If you use special paper such as letterhead,


paper with holes or paper with pre-prints like logo or
company name, refer to the Paper on Appendix-13.

2-21
Preparation before Use

Loading Paper in the Cassettes


The 2 standard cassettes will each hold plain paper, recycled paper or color paper.
Cassette holds up to 500 sheets (80 g/m2).

The following paper sizes are supported: Ledger, Legal, Oficio II, 8.5×13.5", Letter, Letter-R, Statement, A3,
B4, A4, A4-R, B5, B5-R, A5, Folio, 8K, 16K, and 16K-R.

IMPORTANT:
• You should not use inkjet printer paper or any paper with a special surface coating. (Such paper may cause
paper jams or other faults.)
• When using media types other than plain paper (such as recycled or colored paper), always specify the
media type setting. (Refer to Specifying Paper Size and Media Type for the Cassettes on page 2-28)
The cassettes can hold paper with weights up to 120 g/m2.
• Do not load paper that is heavier than 121 g/m2 in the cassettes. Use the multi purpose tray for paper that is
heavier than 121 g/m2.

1 Pull the cassette out toward you until it stops.

NOTE: Do not pull out more than one cassette at a


time.

2 Using the paper length guide, move the plate to fit


the paper.

When loading A4 or smaller paper into cassette 1,


lift up the paper length guide. For B4 or larger
paper, lower the paper length guide.

NOTE: Paper sizes are marked on the cassette.

3 Holding the paper width adjusting tab, move the


paper width guides to fit the paper.

2-22
Preparation before Use

NOTE: Paper sizes are indicated on the cassettes.


To change between inch size and metric size (A, B
sizes), follow the steps below to adjust the size switch.
A
1. Holding the paper width adjusting tab, move the 2
B
paper width guide to a position other than that of the
paper.

2. Turn the size switch A 90°.


>

3. Move the size lever B up (C) or down (I).


C: metric size (centimeters) (A, B sizes)
I: inch size

4. Turn the size switch 90°to lock it.


>

4 Align the paper flush against the left side of the


cassette.

IMPORTANT:
• Before loading the paper, be sure that it is not
curled or folded. Paper that is curled or folded may
cause paper jams.
• Ensure that the loaded paper does not exceed the
level indicator (see illustration below).
• When loading the paper, keep the side that was
closest the package seal facing up.
• The paper length and width guides must be
adjusted to the paper size. Loading the paper
without adjusting these guides may cause skewed
feeding and paper jams.
• Be sure that the paper length and width guides rest
securely against the paper. If there is a gap,
readjust the guides to fit the paper.

2-23
Preparation before Use

5 Insert the appropriate paper size card in the slot to


indicate the size of the paper inside.

6 Gently push the cassette back in.

NOTE: If the machine will not be used for a prolonged


period, protect all paper from humidity by removing it
from the cassettes and sealing it in the paper storage
bag.

7 Select the media type (plain, recycled, etc.) loaded


in the cassette. (Refer to Specifying Paper Size
and Media Type for the Cassettes on page 2-28.)

Loading Paper in the Multi Purpose Tray

The multi purpose tray will hold up to 200 sheets of plain paper (80 g/m2).

The multi purpose tray accepts paper sizes from A3 to A6 and Hagaki and from Ledger to Statement-R, 8K, 16K
and 16K-R. Be sure to use the multi purpose tray when you print on any special paper.

IMPORTANT: When using media types other than plain paper (such as recycled or colored paper), always
specify the media type setting. (Refer to Specifying Paper Size and Media Type for the Multi Purpose Tray on
page 2-30.) If you are using a paper weight of 106 g/m2 or more, set the media type to Thick.

The capacity of the multi purpose tray is as follows.

• Hagaki: 80 sheets
• OHP film: 25 sheets
• Envelope DL, Envelope C5, Envelope #10 (Commercial #10), Monarch, Youkei 4, Youkei 2: 20 sheets

NOTE: When you load custom size paper, enter the paper size by referring to Specifying Paper Size and
Media Type for the Multi Purpose Tray on page 2-30.
When you use special paper such as transparencies or thick paper, select the media type by referring to
Specifying Paper Size and Media Type for the Multi Purpose Tray on page 2-30.

2-24
Preparation before Use

1 Open the multi purpose tray.

2 Adjust the paper width guides to the width of the


paper.

3 Insert the paper along the paper width guides into


the tray until it stops.

IMPORTANT: Keep the side that was closest the


package seal facing up.
Curled paper must be uncurled before use.
Straighten the top edge if it is curled.
When loading paper into the multi purpose tray, check
that there is no paper left over in the tray from a previous
job before loading the paper. If there is just a small
amount of paper left over in the multi purpose tray and
you want to add more, first remove the left-over paper
from the tray and include it with the new paper before
loading the paper back into the tray.

2-25
Preparation before Use

Loading Envelopes
Up to 20 envelopes may be loaded in the multi purpose tray.

Acceptable envelope sizes are as follows.

Acceptable Envelope Size

Youkei 2 162×114 (mm)

Youkei 4 235×105 (mm)

Monarch 3 7/8"×7 1/2"

Envelope #10 (Commercial #10) 4 1/8"×9 1/2"

Envelope DL 110×220 (mm)

Envelope C5 162×229 (mm)

1 Open the multi purpose tray.

2 Adjust the paper width guides to the width of the


envelope.

3 For landscape form envelopes, close the flap.


Insert the envelope all the way along the width
guides, keeping the printing side face-up and the
edge with the flap facing towards you.

For portrait form envelopes, close the flap. Insert


the envelope all the way along the width guides,
keeping the printing side face-up and the edge with
the flap facing the insertion slot.

2-26
Preparation before Use

When you load envelopes or cardstock in the multi purpose tray


Load envelope with the print side facing up.
2

Landscape form
envelopes

Portrait form envelopes

Cardstock (Hagaki)

Return postcard (Oufuku Hagaki)

NOTE: Use unfolded return postcard (Oufuku Hagaki).

IMPORTANT: How to load envelopes (orientation and


facing) will differ depending on the type of envelope. Be
sure to load it in correctly, otherwise printing may be
done in the wrong direction or on the wrong face.

NOTE: When you load envelopes in the multi purpose


tray, select the envelope type by referring to Specifying
Paper Size and Media Type for the Multi Purpose
Tray on page 2-30.

2-27
Preparation before Use

Specifying Paper Size and Media


The default paper size setting for cassettes 1 and 2, for multi purpose tray and for the optional paper feeder
(cassettes 3 and 4) is [Auto], and the default media type setting is [Plain].

To fix the type of paper to be used in cassettes, specify the paper size and media type setting. (Refer to
Specifying Paper Size and Media Type for the Cassettes on page 2-28.)

To fix the type of paper to be used in multi purpose tray, specify the paper size setting. (Refer to Specifying
Paper Size and Media Type for the Multi Purpose Tray on page 2-30.)

Specifying Paper Size and Media Type for the Cassettes

To fix the type of paper to be used in cassettes 1 or 2 or the optional paper feeder (cassettes 3 and 4), specify
the paper size. Also, you use a media type other than plain paper, specify the media type setting.

Selection Item Selectable Size/Type

Paper Auto Paper size is automatically detected and


Size selected. Select whether the paper is in Metric
size or in Inch size.

Standard Select from the standard sizes. Selectable paper


Sizes 1 sizes are as follows.
Inch size: Ledger, Letter-R, Letter, Legal,
Statement-R, 8.5×13.5" and Oficio II
Metric size: A3, B4, A4, A4-R, B5, B5-R, A5-R,
and Folio

Standard Select from the standard sizes not included in


Sizes 2 Standard Sizes 1. Selectable paper sizes are as
follows.
Inch size: A3, B4, A4, A4-R, B5, B5-R, A5-R,
Folio, 8K, 16K-R and 16K
Metric size: Ledger, Letter-R, Letter, Legal,
Statement-R, 8.5×13.5", Oficio II, 8K, 16K-R and
16K

Media Type Plain (105 g/m2 or less), Rough, Vellum (64 g/m2
or less), Recycled, Preprinted**, Bond*, Color,
Prepunched**, Letterhead**, Thick (106 g/m2 and
more), High Quality and Custom 1~8*
* To change to a media type other than Plain, refer to Paper Weight on
page 8-7. When the paper weight settings shown below are
selected, the media indicated for each setting cannot be selected.
• Custom 1 to 8: Heavy 3 or Extra Heavy
** To print on preprinted or prepunched paper or on letterhead, refer to
Special Paper Action on page 8-10.

NOTE: If the optional FAX kit is installed, the available media types for printing received faxes are as shown
below.
Plain, Recycled, Bond, Color, High Quality, Rough and Custom 1 to 8

2-28
Preparation before Use

1 Press the System Menu key.

2 Press [Common Settings], [Next] of Original /


Paper Settings, [Next] of Cassette Setting.

3 Cassette Setting, select one of [Cassette 1] to


[Cassette 4] and press [Next].

Then press [Change] of Paper Size.

NOTE: [Cassette 3] and [Cassette 4] are shown when


the optional paper feeder is installed.

4 For automatic detection of the paper size, press


[Auto] and select [Metric] or [Inch] as the unit.

Common Settings - Paper Size


To select the paper size, press [Standard Sizes 1]
Set cassette paper size. or [Standard Sizes 2] and select the paper size.

Auto Ledger Letter Letter Legal

Standard Statement 8.5x13.5" OficioII


Sizes 1

Standard
Sizes 2

Cancel OK

Status 08/08/2009 10:10

5 Press [OK]. The previous screen reappears.

Common Settings - Media Type


6 Press [Change] of Media Type and select the
Select type of paper in Cassette 1.
media type. Then press [OK].

Plain Rough Vellum

Recycled Preprinted Bond Color

Prepunched Letterhead High Quality

Custom 1 Custom 2 Custom 3 Custom 4 Custom 5

Custom 6 Custom 7 Custom 8

Cancel OK

Status 08/08/2009 10:10

2-29
Preparation before Use

Specifying Paper Size and Media Type for the Multi Purpose Tray

To fix the type of paper to be used in the multi purpose tray, specify the paper size.When using other than a
plain paper, specify the media type.

Item Description

Paper Auto Paper size is automatically detected and selected.


Size Select whether the paper is in Metric size or in Inch size.

Standard Select from the standard sizes. Selectable paper sizes


Sizes 1 are as follows.
Inch size: Ledger, Letter-R, Letter, Legal, Statement-R,
Executive, 8.5×13.5" and Oficio II
Metric size: A3, A4-R, A4, A5-R, A6-R, B4-R, B5-R, B5,
B6-R and Folio

Standard Select from the standard sizes not included in Standard


Sizes 2 Sizes 1. Selectable paper sizes are as follows.
Inch size: A3, A4-R, A4, A5-R, A6-R B4-R, B5-R, B5,
B6-R, Folio, 8K, 16K-R and 16K
Metric size: Ledger, Letter-R, Letter, Legal, Statement-R,
Executive, 8.5×13.5", Oficio II, 8K, 16K-R and 16K

Others Select from special standard sizes and custom sizes.


Selectable paper sizes are as follows.
ISO B5, Envelope #10 (Commercial #10), Envelope #9
(Commercial #9), Envelope #6 (Commercial #6 3/4),
Envelope Monarch, Envelope DL, Envelope C5,
Envelope C4, Hagaki, Oufuku Hagaki, Youkei 4,
Youkei 2

Size Enter the size not included in the standard size.


Entry Selectable paper sizes are as follows.
Inch size
X (Horizontal): 5.83~17" (in 0.01" increments),
Y (Vertical): 3.86~11.69" (in 0.01" increments)
Metric size
X (Horizontal): 148~432 mm (in 1mm increments),
Y (Vertical): 98~297 mm (in 1mm increments)

Media Type Selectable media types are as follows.


Plain (105g /m2 or less), Rough, Transparency,
Vellum (64 g/m2 or less), Labels, Recycled, Preprinted**,
Bond, Cardstock, Color, Prepunched**, Letterhead**,
Envelope, Thick (106 g/m2 and more), High Quality and
Custom 1~8
* To change to a media type other than Plain, refer to Paper Weight on page
8-7.
** To print on preprinted or prepunched paper or on letterhead, refer to Special
Paper Action on page 8-10.

NOTE: If the optional FAX kit is installed and the multi purpose tray is used to print a received FAX, the
available media types are as shown below.
Plain, Recycled, Bond, Color, High Quality, Rough and Custom 1 to 8

2-30
Preparation before Use

1 Press the System Menu key.

2 Press [Common Settings], [Next] of Original /


Paper Settings, [Next] of MP Tray Setting, and then
[Change] of Paper Size.

Common Settings - Multi Purpose Tray Setting


3 For automatic detection of the paper size, press
Set the multi-purpose tray paper size. [Auto] and select [Metric] or [Inch] as the unit.

To select the paper size, press any of [Standard


Auto Ledger Letter Letter Legal
Sizes 1], [Standard Sizes 2], [Others] or [Size
Standard
Sizes 1
Statement Executive 8.5x13.5" OficioII Entry] and select the paper size.
Standard
Sizes 2
Others

Size Entry

Cancel OK

Status 08/08/2009 10:10

Common Settings - Paper Size


If you have chosen [Size Entry], press [+] or [–] to
Set the multi-purpose tray paper size.
enter X (horizontal) and Y (vertical) sizes. You may
enter the size directly using the numeric keys by
pressing [# Keys].
Auto

Standard X(5.83 - 17.00) Y(3.86 - 11.69)


Sizes 1 " "
17 11
Standard
Sizes 2
Others
# Keys # Keys
Size Entry

Cancel OK

Status 08/08/2009 10:10

4 Press [OK]. The previous screen reappears.

Common Settings - Media Type


5 Press [Change] of Media Type and select the
Select type of paper in Multi-Purpose Tray. media type. Then press [OK].

Plain Transparency Rough Vellum Labels

Recycled Preprinted Bond Cardstock Color

Prepunched Letterhead Envelope Thick

High Quality Custom 1 Custom 2 Custom 3 Custom 4

Custom 5 Custom 6 Custom 7 Custom 8

Cancel OK

Status 08/08/2009 10:10

2-31
Preparation before Use

Loading Originals
Follow the steps below to load originals for copying, sending or storing.

Placing Originals on the Platen


You may place books or magazines on the platen in addition to ordinary sheet originals.

1 Open the original cover.

NOTE: If the optional document processor is installed,


open the document processor. Before opening the
document processor, be sure that there are no originals
left on the original table or on the original eject table.
Originals left on the original table or on the original
eject table may fall off when the document processor is
opened.
Keep the document processor open if the original is
40 mm (1 5/8") or thicker.

2 Place the original. Put the scanning side facedown


and align it flush against the original size indicator
plates with the back left corner as the reference
point.

2-32
Preparation before Use

 Original size indicator plates


(Inch models)

(Metric models)

3 Close the original cover.

IMPORTANT: Do not push the original cover forcefully


when you close it. Excessive pressure may crack the
platen glass.

NOTE: Shadows may be produced around the edges


and in the middle of open-faced originals.

CAUTION: Do not leave the document processor open


as there is a danger of personal injury.

2-33
Preparation before Use

Loading Originals in the Document Processor


The optional document processor automatically scans each sheet of multiple originals. Both sides of two-sided
originals are scanned.

Part Names of the Document Processor


(1) Original placement indicator
1 2 3 4 5 6
(2) Top cover
(3) Original width guides
(4) Original table
(5) Original eject table
(6) Original stopper
(7) Opening handle
7

Originals Supported by the Document Processor

The document processor supports the following types of originals.

Weight 45 to 160 g/m2

Size Maximum A3 to Minimum A5-R


Maximum Ledger to Minimum Statement-R

Capacity Plain paper (80 g/m2), Colored paper, Recycled paper: 75


sheets (Mixed sized originals: 30 sheets)
Thick paper (120 g/m2): 49 sheets
Thick paper (160 g/m2): 37 sheets
Art paper: 1 sheet
High quality paper (110 g/m2): 54 sheets

Originals Not Supported by the Document Processor

Do not use the document processor for the following types of originals.

• Soft originals such as vinyl sheets


• Transparencies such as OHP film
• Carbon paper
• Originals with very slippery surfaces
• Originals with adhesive tape or glue
• Wet originals
• Originals with correction fluid which is not dried
• Irregularly shaped (non-rectangular) originals
• Originals with cut-out sections
• Crumpled paper
• Originals with folds (Straighten the folds before loading. Failure to do so may cause the originals to jam).
• Originals bound with clips or staples (Remove the clips or staples and straighten curls, wrinkles or creases
before loading. Failure to do so may cause the originals to jam).

2-34
Preparation before Use

How to Load Originals

IMPORTANT: Before loading originals, be sure that there are no originals left on the original eject table.
Originals left on the original eject table may cause the new originals to jam.
2
1 Adjust the original width guides to fit the originals.

2 Place the originals. Put the side to be scanned (or


the first side of two-sided originals) face-up. Slide
the leading edge into the document processor as
far as it will go. The original placement indicator will
be lit.

IMPORTANT: Confirm that the original width guides


exactly fit the originals. If there is a gap, readjust the
original width guides. The gap may cause the originals
to jam.

Ensure that loaded originals do not exceed the


level indicator. Exceeding the maximum level may
cause the originals to jam (see the figure).

Originals with punched holes or perforated lines


should be placed in such a way that the holes or
perforations will be scanned last (not first).

Original placement indicator


The original placement indicator is lit or unlit depending
on how originals are placed.

Indications and their status are as follows.

• Green (left indicator) lit: Original is placed


properly.
• Green (left indicator) blinking: Original is not
placed properly. Remove and place again.
• Red (right indicator) blinking: Original is jammed.
Remove the jammed original and place it properly.

2-35
Preparation before Use

2-36
3 Basic Operation

This chapter explains the following operations.

• Login/Logout .......................................................................................3-2
• Enter key and Quick No. Search key ..................................................3-2
• Touch Panel Display ...........................................................................3-4
• Original Preview..................................................................................3-5
• Copying...............................................................................................3-6
• Printing - Printing from Applications..................................................3-19
• Sending.............................................................................................3-21
• Specifying Destination ......................................................................3-28
• Using Document Box ........................................................................3-31
• Basic Operation for Document Box...................................................3-33
• Canceling Jobs .................................................................................3-40
• Quick Setup Screen ..........................................................................3-41
• Program (Copying and Sending) ......................................................3-44
• Registering Shortcuts (Copy, Send, and Document Box Settings) ...3-44
• Using the Internet Browser ...............................................................3-47

3-1
Basic Operation

Login/Logout
If user login administration is enabled, it is necessary to enter the login user name and password to use the
machine.

NOTE: You will be unable to login if you forget your login user name or login password. In this event, login with
administrator privileges and change your login user name or login password.

Login
1 If the screen shown appears during operations,
Enter login user name and password. press [Login User Name].
Login to: Local
Press [# Keys] to enter the login data using the
Login
User Name abcdef numeric keys.
# Keys

Login
********
Password

# Keys

IC Card
Login

Check Counter Cancel Login

Status 08/08/2009 10:10

2 Enter the login user name and press [OK].

NOTE: Refer to the Character Entry Method on


Appendix-10 for details on entering characters.

3 Press [Login Password].

Press [# Keys] to enter the login data using the


numeric keys.

4 Enter the password and press [OK].

5 Check the login user name and password are


correct, and press [Login].

NOTE: If Network Authentication is selected as the


user authentication method, either Local or Network
can be selected as the authentication destination.

Logout

To logout from the machine, press the Logout key to


return to the login user name/password entry screen.

3-2
Basic Operation

Enter key and Quick No. Search key


This section explains how to use the Enter key and Quick No. Search key on the operation panel.

Using the Enter ( ) key


The Enter key works in the same way as keys displayed on the touch panel, such as [OK] and [Close].
3
The Enter symbol ( ) is displayed next to the keys whose operations are carried out by the Enter key (e.g.
[ OK], [ Close]).

The operation of the Enter key is explained below using copy paper selection as an example. For details of the
procedure, refer to Paper Selection on page 4-4.

Ready to copy. Copies 1 In the paper selection screen, press the key for the
cassette containing the required paper size.
Paper Selection

The Enter ( ) symbol appears on the [OK] on the


Place original.
Auto touch panel, indicating that the Enter key performs
Letter Letter the same action as [OK].
Plain Plain
Ledger MP Tray

Original : ---
Plain Setting
2 To copy using the selected paper, press the Enter
Letter
Zoom
Paper
: 100%
: ---
Plain key (or [OK]).
Letter
Preview
Plain

Add Shortcut Cancel OK

Status 08/80/2009 10:10

Using the Quick No. Search ( ) key


Use the Quick No. Search keys to perform an action by simply entering a number directly using the numeric
keys. For example, you can specify the speed dial for a transmission destination or recall a stored program by
its program number.

The Quick No. Search key performs the same action as the [No.] displayed on the touch panel.

The use of the Quick No. Search key is explained below using an example in which a speed dial number is
specified and used to select a destination. For more information on speed dialing, refer to Specifying
Destination on page 3-28.

1 Press the Quick No. Search key (or [No.]) in the


basic send screen.

Ready to send. Destination 2 In the number entry screen, use the numeric keys
Place original. to enter the speed dial number.
Destination Detail Address
Book
A OFFICE

B OFFICE
1234567890

1/10
E-mail 3 If you entered speed dial number between 1 and 3
Addr Entry
Enter One Touch key number
using # keys.
digits long, press the Enter key (or [OK]).
C OFFICE Folder Path
(0001 - 1000) Entry
On Hook Direct 0011
FAX No. The specified destination appears in the
Entry

AAA
0001
BBB
00
i-FAX
destination list.
Cancel OK Addr Entry
0006 0007 0008 0009 0010 1/100
WSD Scan
FFF GGG HHH III JJJ

Destination Quick Setup Original/Sending Color/ Advanced


NOTE: If you enter a 4-digit speed dial number, the
Status
Data Format Image Quality Setup
08/08/2009 10:10
operation in step 3 can be omitted. The basic send
screen appears and the specified destination appears
in the destinations list.

3-3
Basic Operation

Touch Panel Display


Display for Originals and Paper
The touch panel displays the selected paper source and output tray.

Press Start key to start printing. Copies


Press [Cancel] to change settings.

Copy Image Original position Shortcut 1

Output
Shortcut 2
tray
Paper Shortcut 3
source
Auto 100% Normal 0
Size/orientation of Shortcut 4

original and paper Original : Letter


Paper Zoom Density
Selection
Zoom : 100% Shortcut 5
Paper : Letter 2-sided 2 in 1 Off
>>2-sided
Cancel Duplex Combine Staple Shortcut 6

Quick Setup Org./Paper/ Image Quality Layout/Edit Advanced


Finishing Setup
Status 08/08/2009 10:10

3-4
Basic Operation

Original Preview
You can display a preview image of the scanned document on the panel.

NOTE: To view a preview of an image stored in a Custom Box, refer to Previewing Documents/Checking
Document Details on page 3-37.
The procedure for previewing scanned originals is explained below.
3
The procedure described here is for copying a single-page original.

1 Press the Copy key and place the original on the


platen.

Ready to copy. Copies 2 Press [Preview].

Copy Image Shortcut 1

Shortcut 2

Place original.
Shortcut 3

Auto 100% Normal 0


Shortcut 4
Paper Zoom Density
Original : --- Selection
Zoom : 100% Shortcut 5
Paper : --- 2-sided 2 in 1 Off
>>2-sided
Preview Duplex Combine Staple Shortcut 6

Quick Setup Org./Paper/ Layout/Edit Advanced


Image Quality
Finishing Setup
Status 08/08/2009 10:10

3 The machine starts scanning the original. When


scanning is completed, the preview image appears
on the panel.

Press Start key to start printing. Copies 4 To change the quality or the layout, press [Cancel]
Press [Cancel] to change settings.
or the Stop key. Change the settings and press
Copy Image Shortcut 1
[Preview] again to see a preview image with the
Shortcut 2 new settings.
Shortcut 3

Auto 100% Normal 0


Shortcut 4 NOTE: If you scan a multi-page original, only the first
Paper Zoom Density
Original : Letter Selection
Shortcut 5
page is previewed.
Zoom : 100%
Paper : Letter 2-sided 2 in 1 Off
>>2-sided
Cancel Duplex Combine Staple Shortcut 6

Quick Setup Org./Paper/ Image Quality Layout/Edit Advanced


Finishing Setup
Status 08/08/2009 10:10

5 If there is no problem with the preview image, press


the Start key. Copying begins.

3-5
Basic Operation

Copying
Follow the steps as below for basic copying.

1 Press the Copy key when the Copy key/indicator


is off.

NOTE: If the touch panel is turned off, press the


Energy Saver key or the Power key and wait for the
machine to warm up.

2 Place the originals on the platen or in the optional


document processor.

NOTE: For loading instructions, refer to Loading


Originals on page 2-32.

Ready to copy. Copies 3 Check that [Auto] is selected of Paper Selection on


the touch panel. Paper that matches the size of the
Copy Image Shortcut 1
original will be selected automatically.
Shortcut 2

Place original. To change the paper size, press, [Org./Paper/


Shortcut 3
Finishing], [Paper Selection] and select the desired
Auto 100% Normal 0
Shortcut 4 paper source.
Paper Zoom Density
Original : --- Selection
Zoom : 100% Shortcut 5
Paper : --- 2-sided 2 in 1 Off
>>2-sided
Preview Duplex Combine Staple Shortcut 6 NOTE: Select paper size manually, if necessary,
Quick Setup Org./Paper/ Color/ Layout/Edit Advanced
instead of using automatic paper selection.
Finishing Image Quality Setup
Status 08/08/2009 10:10

4 Use the numeric keys to enter the copy quantity.


Specify the desired number up to 999.

5 Press the Start key to start copying.

6 Remove the finished copies from the top tray.

3-6
Basic Operation

Adjusting Density
Use this procedure to adjust the density when copying.

Density Adjustment Option Description

Manual Adjust density using 7 or 13 levels.

Auto Optimum density is selected according 3


to the density of the original.

NOTE: You may choose Auto mode as the default setting (refer to Density on page 8-18).

The procedure for adjusting the density of copies is explained below.

1 Press the Copy key.

2 Place the originals on the platen.

3 Set the original on the platen and press [Image


Quality] -> [Density].

Ready to copy. Copies 4 Adjust density manually pressing [-3] (Lighter) to


[+3] (Darker). You can change the density level [-3]
Density
(Lighter) to [+3] (Darker) in half-steps.
Auto

Place original.
To change density adjustment from Manual to Auto,
Lighter Normal Darker
press [Auto].

Original : ---
-3 -2 -1 0 +1 +2 +3
5 Press [OK].
Zoom : 100% -2.5 -1.5 -0.5 +0.5 +1.5 +2.5
Paper : ---

Preview

Add Shortcut Cancel OK

Status 08/08/2009 10:10

6 Press the Start key. Copying begins.

3-7
Basic Operation

Selecting Image Quality


Select image quality suited to the type of original.

The table below shows the quality options.

Image Quality Option Description

Text+Photo For originals with both text and


photographs.

Text For originals primarily consisting of text.

Photo For photos taken with a camera.

Printed Document For documents printed from this machine.

The procedure for selecting the quality of copies is explained below.

1 Press the Copy key.

2 Place the originals on the platen.

3 Set the original on the platen and press [Image


Quality] -> [Original Image].

Ready to copy. Copies 4 Select the image quality.


1
Original Image 5 Press [OK].
Select original image type for best results.
[Printed Document]: Suitable for documents printed from
this machine.
Place original.

Text+Photo Text Photo

Original : ---
Zoom : 100%
Paper : ---
Printed
Preview Document

Add Shortcut Cancel OK

Status 08/08/2009 10:10

6 Press the Start key. Copying begins.

3-8
Basic Operation

Zoom Copying
Adjust the magnification to reduce or enlarge the original image. The following zoom options are available.

Auto Zoom
Ledger: 129 % Automatically reduces or enlarges the original image
suitably to the selected paper size.
Letter-R 3
A3: 141 %
Statement-R: 64 %
A4

A5: 70 %

Manual Zoom
Manually reduces or enlarges the original image in 1%
increments between 25% and 400%.
25 %

400 %

Preset Zoom

Reduces or enlarges at preset magnifications.

The following magnifications are available.

Model Zoom Level (Original Copy)

Inch Models 100%, Auto, 400% (Max.), 200% (STMT >>


Ledger), 154%(STMT >> Legal), 129% (Letter >>
Ledger), 121% (Legal >> Ledger), 78% (Legal >>
Letter), 77% (Ledger >> Legal), 64% (Ledger >>
Letter), 50% (Ledger >> STMT), 25% (Min.)

Metric Models 100%, Auto, 400% (Max.), 200% (A5 >> A3),
141% (A4 >> A3, A5 >> A4), 127% (Folio >>
A3), 106% (11×15" >> A3), 90% (Folio >> A4),
75% (11×15" >> A4),
70% (A3 >> A4, A4 >> A5), 50%, 25% (Min.)

Metric Models (Asia 100%, Auto, 400% (Max.), 200% (A5 >> A3),
Pacific) 141% (A4 >> A3, B5 >> B4), 122% (A4 >> B4,
A5 >> B5), 115% (B4 >> A3, B5 >> A4), 86%
(A3 >> B4, A4 >> B5), 81%(B4 >> A4, B5 >>
A5), 70% (A3 >> A4, B4 >> B5), 50%, 25%
(Min.)

3-9
Basic Operation

XY Zoom
Select vertical and horizontal magnifications
individually. Reduce or enlarge original images in 1%
increments between 25% and 400%.

The procedure for using zoom copying is explained below.

1 Press the Copy key.

2 Place the originals on the platen.

3 Set the original on the platen and press [Layout/


Edit] -> [Zoom].

Ready to copy.
Copies 4 Press [Standard Zoom] to use Auto Zoom.

Zoom
(25 - 400)
Press [+] or [–] to change the displayed
Standard
Zoom 400 %
magnification as desired. You can also enter the
Place original. XY Zoom 400%
Max.
78%
Legal
>>Letter
magnification directly using the numeric keys by
200%
STMT
# Keys 77% Ledger pressing [# Keys].
>>Ledger >>Legal

STMT 100% 64% Ledger


154%

Original : ---
>>Legal >>Letter
When using Preset Zoom, select the key of desired
Letter Auto Ledger
Zoom
Paper
: 400%
: ---
129%
>>Ledger
50%
>>STMT magnification.
121%
Legal 25% Min.
Preview >>Ledger
When using XY Zoom, press [XY Zoom].
Add Shortcut Cancel OK

Status 08/08/2009 10:10

Press [+] or [–] to change the displayed


magnifications of X (horizontal) and Y (vertical).
You can also enter the magnification directly using
the numeric keys by pressing [# Keys].

Ready to copy. Copies Press [Original Orientation] to select orientation of


the originals, either [Top Edge Top] or [Top Edge
Zoom
(25 - 400)
Left]. Then press [OK].
Standard X
Zoom 100 %

Place original. XY Zoom

# Keys

(25 - 400)
Y

Original : --- 100 %


Top Edge Top
Zoom : 100%
Paper : ---
Original
Preview # Keys Orientation

Add Shortcut Cancel OK

Status 08/08/2009 10:10

5 Press [OK].

6 Press the Start key. Copying begins.

3-10
Basic Operation

Duplex Copying
Produce two-sided copies. The following duplex options are available.

You can also create single-sided copies from two-sided originals or originals with facing pages such as books.
The following modes are available.

One-sided to Two-sided
Produces two-sided copies from one-sided originals. In
3
5
case of an odd number of originals, the back side of the
4 5 last copy will be blank.
3 3

4
2 1
2

Original Copy

The following binding options are available.


ghi A B
ghi
def ghi
abc
abc
abc
A Original Left/Right to Binding Left/Right: Images on
def

the second sides are not rotated.


def
B Original Left/Right to Binding Top: Images on the
Original Copy second sides are rotated 180°. Copies can be bound
on the top edge, facing the same orientation when
turning the pages.

Two-sided to One-sided
Copies each side of a two-sided original onto two
1 1 2
individual sheets. The optional document processor is
2

required.

Original Copy
The following binding options are available.

• Binding Left/Right: Images on the second sides


are not rotated.
• Binding Top: Images on the second sides are
rotated 180°.

Two-sided to Two-sided
Produces two-sided copies from two-sided originals.
5 5
3 3
The optional document processor is required.
4

1 1
2

NOTE: The paper sizes supported in Two-sided to


Two-sided are Ledger, Legal, Letter, Letter-R,
Original Copy Executive, Statement-R, Oficio II, 8.5×13.5", A3, B4,
A4, A4-R, B5, B5-R, A5-R and Folio.

3-11
Basic Operation

Book to One-sided
Produces a 1-sided copy of a 2-sided or open book
1 2 1 2 original.

The following binding options are available.

Original Copy • Binding Left: Originals with facing pages are


copied from left to right.
• Binding Right: Originals with facing pages are
copied from right to left.

NOTE: The following sizes of originals and paper are


supported in Two-sided to One-sided and Book to One-
sided. Original: Ledger, Letter-R, A3, B4, A4-R, B5-R,
A5-R and 8K. Paper: Letter, A4, B5 and 16K. You may
change paper size and reduce or enlarge copy to
match that size.

Book to Two-sided

Facing pages Facing pages Produces two-sided copies from an open book original
-> Two-sided -> Facing pages with facing pages.
3
1 2 3 4 1 2
4

1 3
0

NOTE: The following sizes of originals and paper are


2

supported in Book to Two-sided mode. Original:


3 Ledger, Letter-R, A3, B4, A4-R, B5-R, A5-R and 8K.
2 1 4 3 2 1
4

1 0
Paper: Letter, A4 and B5.
3
2

Original Copy

The procedure for using two-sided/duplex copying is explained below.

1 Press the Copy key.

2 Place the originals on the platen.

3 Press [Layout/Edit] and then [Duplex].

Ready to copy. Copies 4 Select the desired Duplex option.

Duplex 5 If you choose [1-sided>>2-sided] or


1-sided
>>1-sided [2-sided>>2-sided], select the binding edge of the
Place original.
1-sided
>>2-sided
finished copies of Finishing.
2-sided
>>1-sided

2-sided Finishing
If you choose [Book>>2-sided], press [Book>>2-
Original : ---
>>2-sided
sided] or [Book>> Book] of Finishing to select the
Book Top Edge Top
Zoom
Paper
: 100%
: ---
>>1-sided
Binding Binding
setting for duplex.
Left/Right Top Original
Book Orientation
Preview >>2-sided

Add Shortcut Cancel OK

Status 08/08/2009 10:10

3-12
Basic Operation

Ready to copy. Copies 6 If you choose [2-sided>>1-sided],


[2-sided>>2-sided], [Book>>1-sided] or
Duplex
Original
[Book>>2-sided], select the binding edge of the
1-sided
>>1-sided originals of Original.
1-sided
Place original. >>2-sided Binding Binding

2-sided
>>1-sided
Left/Right Top
7 Press [Original Orientation] to select orientation of
2-sided
the originals, either [Top Edge Top] or [Top Edge
>>2-sided
Left]. Then press [OK].
3
Original : ---
Book Top Edge Top
Zoom : 100%
>>1-sided
Paper : ---
Original
Preview
Book
>>2-sided
Orientation 8 Press [OK].
Add Shortcut Cancel OK

Status 08/08/2009 10:10

9 Press the Start key.

Once an original placed on the platen is scanned,


replace it with the next one. Then, press the Start
key.

After scanning all originals, press [Finish Scan] to


start copying.

Collate/Offset Copying
The machine can collate and offset at the same time as it copies.

You can use the Collate/Offset copy function for tasks such as those shown below.

Collate
3
Scan multiple originals and deliver complete sets of
2 copies as required according to page number.
3 1
3
2 2
1
1 3
2
1

Original Copy

Offset

Without Document Finisher


If the optional document finisher is not installed, when
3
2 you use offsetting, printed copies are produced after
1
rotating each set (or page) by 90º.
3

2
3
2

1
NOTE: You need to load the same sized paper with
1

2
3 different orientation in the paper source other than the
1 selected paper source. The paper sizes supported in
Offset are A4, B5, Letter and 16K.

Original Copy (each set)

3-13
Basic Operation

With Document Finisher


When you use offsetting, printed copies are segregated
3 3
2 after each set of copies (or after each page).
2 3 1
2
1 3 1
2
1
NOTE: The optional document finisher is required.

Original Copy (each set)

The procedure for using collate/offset copying is


explained below.

1 Press the Copy key.

2 Place the originals on the platen.

3 Press [Org./Paper/Finishing] and then [Collate/


Offset].

Ready to copy. Copies 4 To use collate copying, press [On] of Collate.

Collate/Offset To use offset copying, press [Each Set] of Offset.


Collate

Place original.
Press [OK].
Off On

Offset
Original : ---
Zoom : 100% Off Each Set
Paper : ---

Preview

Add Shortcut Cancel OK

Status 08/08/2009 10:10

Ready to copy. Copies If [Off] is selected for Collate, press [Off] or [Each
Page] of Offset.
Collate/Offset

Collate 5 Press [OK].


Place original. Off On

Offset
Original : ---
Zoom : 100% Off Each Page
Paper : ---

Preview

Add Shortcut Cancel OK

Status 08/08/2009 10:10

6 Press the Start key. Copying begins.

3-14
Basic Operation

Reserve Next
This function allows you to reserve the next job during printing. Using this function, the original will be scanned
while the machine is printing. When the current print job ends, the reserved copy job is printed. The procedure
differs depending on the Reserve Next Priority (refer to page 8-26).

If Reserve Next Priority is set to [On]

The Copy function default screen appears on the touch panel during printing. 3
Ready to copy. Copies 1 Place the originals onto the machine for reserving
copy, and configure the copy settings.
Copy Image Shortcut 1

Shortcut 2

Place original.
Shortcut 3

Auto 100% Normal 0


Shortcut 4
Paper Zoom Density
Original : --- Selection
Zoom : 100% Shortcut 5
Paper : --- 2-sided 2 in 1 Off
>>2-sided
Preview Duplex Combine Staple Shortcut 6

Quick Setup Org./Paper/ Color/ Layout/Edit Advanced


Finishing Image Quality Setup
Status 08/08/2009 10:10

2 Press the Start key.

The machine starts scanning the originals.


When the current print job ends, the reserved copy
job is printed.

If Reserve Next Priority is set to [Off]

The Copying screen appears on the touch panel during printing.

Copying... Copies 1 Press [Reserve Next].

Job No.: 000021 Job Name: Doc10102008101031 User Name: ----- The default screen for copying appears.
Scanner Setting Printer Setting
Scanned Pages Copies

2 2/ 24
Letter Letter Plain

100% 2-sided

2-sided Collate

Top Edge Top

Top Tray

Cancel Reserve Next

Status 10/10/2008 10:10

2 Place the originals onto the machine for reserving


copy, and configure the copy settings.

3 Press the Start key.

The machine starts scanning the originals.


When the current print job ends, the reserved copy
job is printed.

3-15
Basic Operation

Interrupt Copy
This function allows you to pause the current jobs in progress when you need to make copies immediately.
When interruption copy ends, the machine resumes the paused print jobs.

NOTE: You can change the delay until interrupt copying is cancelled. Change the delay as required. For more
information, refer to Interrupt Clear Timer on page 8-50.

Ready for interrupt copy. Copies 1 Press the Interrupt key.

Copy Image Shortcut 1 Ready for interrupt copy. is displayed.


Shortcut 2

Place original.
The current print job is temporarily interrupted.
Shortcut 3

Auto 100% Normal 0


Shortcut 4
Paper Zoom Density
Original : --- Selection
Zoom : 100% Shortcut 5
Paper : --- 2-sided 2 in 1 Off
>>2-sided
Preview Duplex Combine Staple Shortcut 6

Quick Setup Org./Paper/ Image Quality Layout/Edit Advanced


Finishing Setup
Status 08/08/2009 10:10

2 Place the originals onto the machine for interrupt


copy, and configure the copy settings.

3 Press the Start key to start interrupt copying.

4 When interrupt copying ends, press the Interrupt


key.
The machine resumes the paused print jobs.

3-16
Basic Operation

Staple
Use this feature to staple your finished copies.

NOTE: Stapling requires the optional built-in finisher or document finisher.

The following stapling options and orientations are available.


3
Original Orientation: Original Orientation:
Original Orientation: Original Orientation:
Left Top Edge (Left top Left Top Edge (Left top
Top Edge (Back Edge) Top Edge (Back Edge)
corner) corner)

Document Finisher
Cassette Paper Load
Direction

Document Finisher
Cassette Paper Load
Direction

Built-in Finisher
Cassette Paper Load
Direction

Built-in Finisher
Cassette Paper Load
Direction

3-17
Basic Operation

Use the procedure below to produce stapled copies.

1 Press the Copy key.

2 Place the originals on the platen.

3 Press [Org./Paper/Finishing] and then [Staple].

Ready to copy. Copies 4 Select the staple position.


1
Staple 5 Press [Original Orientation] to choose orientation of
Staple Top 2 staples
Left Top the originals, either [Top Edge Top] or [Top Edge
Place original.
Off Top
Right
2 staples
Right Left]. Then press [OK].
2 staples Bind
Left and Fold
6 Press [OK].
Original : ---
Off Top Edge Top
Zoom : 100%
Paper : ---
Original
Preview Orientation

Add Shortcut Cancel OK

Status 08/08/2009 10:10

7 Press the Start key. Copying begins.

3-18
Basic Operation

Printing - Printing from Applications


Follow the steps below to print documents from applications.

NOTE: To print the document from applications, install the printer driver on your computer from the supplied
CD-ROM (Product Library).

3
1 Create a document using an application.

2 Click File and select Print in the application. The


Print dialog box appears.

3 Click the  button next to the Name field and select


this machine from the list.

4 Enter the desired print quantity in the Number of


copies box. Enter any number up to 999.

When there is more than one document, select


Collate to print out one by one in the sequence of
the page numbers.

5 Click Properties button. The Properties dialog


box appears.

3-19
Basic Operation

6 Select the Basic tab and click Page Size button to


select the paper size.

To print on the special paper such as thick paper or


transparency, click the Media Type menu and
select the media type.

7 Click Source and select the paper source.

NOTE: If you choose Auto Select, paper is supplied


automatically from the paper source loaded with paper
of optimum size and type. To print on special paper
such as envelope or thick paper, place it on the multi
purpose tray and select MP Tray.

8 Select paper orientation, either Portrait or


Landscape, to match the orientation of the
document.

Selecting Rotate 180° will print the document


rotated 180°.

9 Click OK button to return to the Print dialog box.

10 Click OK button to start printing.

3-20
Basic Operation

Sending
This machine can send a scanned image as an attachment to an E-mail message or to a PC linked to the
network. In order to do this, it is necessary to register the sender and destination (recipient) address on the
network.

A network environment which enables the machine to connect to a mail server is required. It is recommended
that a Local Area Network (LAN) be used to assist with transmission speed and security issues.
3
At the same time as you send a scanned image, you can also print the image or send it to the Document Box.

To use the Scanning Function perform the following steps:

• Program the settings, including the E-mail setting on the machine.


• Use COMMAND CENTER (the internal HTML web page) to register the IP address, the host name of the
SMTP server, and the recipient.
• Register the destination in the Address Book or One Touch keys.
• When the PC Folder (SMB/FTP) is selected, it is necessary to share the destination folder. For setting-up
the PC Folder, contact your administrator.
• Creating/Registering a Document Box (when a Document Box is selected as the destination)
• Detailed transmission settings (to select a Document Box as the destination or to print and send the image
at the same time)

Follow the steps below for basic sending. The following four options are available.

• Send as E-mail: Sends a scanned original image as an E-mail attachment...page 3-22


• Send to Folder (SMB): Stores a scanned original image in a shared folder of any PC...page 3-23
• Send to Folder (FTP): Stores a scanned original image in a folder of an FTP server...page 3-23
• Send to Document Box: Sends a document stored in a document box on this machine...page 6-6
• Image Data Scanning with TWAIN / WIA: Loads the document data stored in a Custom Box to a PC...Refer
to the TWAIN/WIA Driver Operation Guide

NOTE: Different sending options can be specified in combination. Refer to Sending to Different Types of
Destinations (Multi Sending) on page 3-30.

3-21
Basic Operation

Send as E-mail
Sends a scanned original image as an E-mail attachment.

NOTE:
• You must have a network environment in which this machine can connect to a mail server. It is
recommended that the machine be used in an environment in which it can connect to the mail server at any
time over a LAN.
• Access the COMMAND CENTER beforehand and specify the settings required for sending e-mail. For
details, see COMMAND CENTER (Settings for E-mail) on page 2-18.

1 Press the Send key.

Displays the screen for sending.

NOTE: Depending on the settings, the address book


screen may appear. In this event, press [Cancel] to
display the screen for sending.

Ready to send. Destination 2 Press [E-mail Addr Entry] and then [E-mail
Place original.
Address].
E-mail Address Entry

E-mail
Address
NOTE: Destination can be specified using the
Address Book or the One Touch Keys. Refer to
Specifying Destination on page 3-28.
Add a new e-mail destination.
Press [E-mail Address], then enter
the address using the keyboard screen.

Add to Addr Book Next Dest. Cancel OK

Status 08/08/2009 10:10

3 Enter destination E-mail address and press [OK].

4 Press [Next Dest.] and repeat steps 3 to specify the


destination. Up to 100 E-mail addresses can be
specified.

NOTE: When [Add to Addr Book] is displayed, the


destinations are registered in the Address Book.

5 Press [OK]. The destinations are registered in the


destination list.

3-22
Basic Operation

Ready to send. Destination 6 Check the destination list.


Place original.

Destination Detail
Address
Book
Select a destination and press [Detail/Edit] to check
ABCD abcd@efg.com To:

TUVW 10.200.188.120 Auto 1/1


E-mail
and edit it.
Addr Entry

Group1 Group1
Folder Path
Entry Select a destination and press [Delete] to remove
On Hook Direct Chain Detail/Edit Delete Recall
FAX No. the destination from the list.
Entry
0001 0002 0003 0004 0005 No.
AAA

0006
BBB

0007
CCC

0008
DDD

0009
EEE

0010 1/100
i-FAX
Addr Entry

NOTE: When selecting [On] for Entry Check for New


3
WSD Scan
FFF GGG HHH III JJJ

Destination Quick Setup Original/Sending Color/ Advanced


Destination (page 8-30), the confirmation screen
Status
Data Format Image Quality Setup
08/08/2009 10:10
appears. Enter the same destination again and press
[OK].
When selecting [On] for Destination Check before Send
(page 8-29), the confirmation screen appears after
pressing the Start key. For details, refer to Confirmation
Screen of Destinations on page 3-27.

Send to Folder (SMB)/Send to Folder (FTP)


Stores a scanned original image file in the specified shared folder of any PC.

Stores a scanned original image in a folder of an FTP server.

NOTE:
• Refer to Help of your operating system for details on how to share a folder.
• Be sure that SMB Protocol or FTP in the COMMAND CENTER is On. For details, refer to the KYOCERA
COMMAND CENTER Operation Guide.

1 Press the Send key.

Displays the screen for sending.

NOTE: Depending on the settings, the address book


screen may appear. In this event, press [Cancel] to
display the screen for sending.

2 Press [Folder Path Entry] and then [SMB] or [FTP].

NOTE: Destination can be specified using the


Address Book or the One Touch Keys. For details, refer
to Specifying Destination on page 3-28.

3-23
Basic Operation

Ready to send. Destination 3 Enter host name, path, login user name and login
Place original.
password. Press the key of each item to first
Folder Path Entry
display the entry screen.
SMB Host Name

Path
FTP

Login
User Name

Login
Password

Specify the folder on the destination


computer.
Connection
Test

Add to Addr Book Next Dest. Cancel OK

Status 08/08/2009 10:10

4 Enter the destination data and press [OK].


Use the keyboard to enter.
Limit: 128 characters
Input: 0 characters

Backspace

! @ # $ % ^ & * ( ) _ + ˜

Q W E R T Y U I O P { } |

A S D F G H J K L : "

Z X C V B N M < > ?

Lower-case
Upper-case Lower-case No./Symbol Space

Cancel OK

Status 08/08/2009 10:10

Data to be entered are as follows.

NOTE: You will be unable to send the data if you forget your login user name or login password. Contact your
administrator and check your login user name or login password.

For send to folder (SMB)

Max.
Item Data to be entered
characters

Host Name* Host name or IP address of the PC to receive the data. Up to 64


characters

Path Path to the receiving folder such as follows. Up to 128


For example, \User\ScanData. characters

Login User Name User name to access the PC Up to 64


For example, abcdnet\james.smith characters

Login Password Password to access the PC Up to 64


characters
* To specify a port number different from the default (139), enter using the format “host name:
port number” (e.g., SMBhostname:140).
To enter the IPv6 address, enclose the address in brackets [ ].
(e.g., [3ae3:9a0:cd05:b1d2:28a:1fc0:a1:10ae]:140)

3-24
Basic Operation

For send to folder (FTP)

Max.
Item Data to be entered
characters

Host Name* Host name or IP address of FTP server Up to 64


characters 3
Path Path to the receiving folder. Up to 128
For example, \User\ScanData. characters
Otherwise the data will be saved in the home directory.

Login User Name FTP server login user name Up to 64


characters

Login Password FTP server login password Up to 64


characters
* To specify a port number different from the default (21), enter using the format “host name:
port number” (e.g., FTPhostname:140).
To enter the IPv6 address, enclose the address in brackets [ ].
(e.g., [3ae3:9a0:cd05:b1d2:28a:1fc0:a1:10ae]:140)

Ready to send. Destination 5 Upon completion of all entries, press [Connection


Place original.
Test] to check the connection.
Folder Path Entry

SMB Host Name

FTP
Path NOTE: Connected. appears when connection to the
Login
destination is correctly established. If Cannot connect.
User Name
appears, review the entry.
Login
Password

Specify the folder on the destination


computer.
Connection
Test
To specify another destination, go to the step 6. To
specify only one destination, go to step 7.
Add to Addr Book Next Dest. Cancel OK

Status 08/08/2009 10:10

6 Press [Next Dest.] and repeat steps 3 to 5 to


specify the destination. You can specify a
combined total of up to 10 FTP and SMB
destination folders.

NOTE: When [Add to Addr Book] is displayed, the


entry is registered in the Address Book.

7 Press [OK] to register the entry in the destination


list.

3-25
Basic Operation

Ready to send. Destination 8 Check the destination list.


Place original.

Destination Detail
Address
Book
Select a destination and press [Detail/Edit] to check
ABCD abcd@efg.com To:

TUVW 10.200.188.120 Auto 1/1


E-mail
and edit it. Edit it, if necessary, referring to steps 3
Addr Entry

Group1 Group1
to 5.
Folder Path
Entry
On Hook Direct Chain Detail/Edit Delete Recall
FAX No. Select a destination and press [Delete] to remove
Entry

AAA
0001
BBB
0002
CCC
0003
DDD
0004
EEE
0005 No.
i-FAX
the destination from the list.
Addr Entry
0006 0007 0008 0009 0010 1/100
WSD Scan
FFF GGG HHH III JJJ

Destination Quick Setup Original/Sending Color/ Advanced


NOTE: When On is selected in FTP Encrypted TX
Status
Data Format Image Quality Setup
08/08/2009 10:10
(page 5-31), keys appear for selecting the encryption
method for the FTP transmission destination. Select
Auto, DES, 3DES or AES as the encryption method.
When selecting [On] for Entry Check for New
Destination (page 8-30), the confirmation screen
appears. Enter the same host name and path again,
and press [OK].
When selecting [On] for Destination Check before Send
(page 8-29), the confirmation screen appears after
pressing the Start key. For details, refer to Confirmation
Screen of Destinations on page 3-27.

3-26
Basic Operation

Confirmation Screen of Destinations


When selecting [On] for Destination Check before Send (page 8-29), the confirmation screen of destinations
appears after pressing the Start key.

Follow the steps below to confirm the destinations.

Ready to send. 1 Press [ ] or [ ] to confirm every destination.


Place original.
Destination
3
Destination Detail
Address
Book
Press [Detail] to display the detailed information on
ABCD abcd@efg.com To:

TUVW 10.200.188.120 Auto 1/1


E-mail the selected destination.
Addr Entry

Group1 Group1
Folder Path
Entry To delete the destination, select the destination you
On Hook Direct Chain Detail/Edit Delete Recall
FAX No. want to delete and press [Delete]. Press [Yes] in the
Entry

AAA
0001
BBB
0002
CCC
0003
DDD
0004
EEE
0005 No.
i-FAX
confirmation screen. The destination is deleted.
Addr Entry

FFF
0006
GGG
0007
HHH
0008
III
0009
JJJ
0010 1/100
WSD Scan To add the destination, press [Cancel] and then
Destination Quick Setup Original/Sending Color/ Advanced
return to the destination screen.
Data Format Image Quality Setup
Status 08/08/2009 10:10

2 Press [Check].

NOTE: Be sure to confirm every destination by


displaying them on the touch panel. You cannot press
[Check] unless you have confirmed every destination.

3 Press the Start key to start sending.

3-27
Basic Operation

Specifying Destination
When specifying destination, choose from the Address Book or use the One Touch Keys.

NOTE: You can set the machine up so that the address book screen appears when you press the Send key.
For details, refer to Setting the Default Send Screen on page 8-30.

Choosing from the Address Book


Select a destination registered in the Address Book.

Ready to send. Destination 1 In the basic screen for sending, press [Address
Place original.
Book].
Destination Detail
Address
ABCD abcd@efg.com To: Book

E-mail
TUVW 10.200.188.120 Auto 1/1
Addr Entry

Group1 Group1
Folder Path
Entry
On Hook Direct Chain Detail/Edit Delete Recall
FAX No.
Entry
0001 0002 0003 0004 0005 No.
AAA BBB CCC DDD EEE i-FAX
Addr Entry
0006 0007 0008 0009 0010 1/100
WSD Scan
FFF GGG HHH III JJJ

Destination Quick Setup Original/Sending Color/ Advanced


Data Format Image Quality Setup
Status 08/08/2009 10:10

Address Book
2 Press the checkbox to select the desired
Addr Book Address Book Sort Name destination from the list. You may choose multiple
Dest. No. Type Name Detail destinations. The selected destinations are
0001 ABCD abcd@efg.com
Search(Name) indicated by a checkmark in the check box. To use
0002 TUVW tuvw@xyz.com
Search(No.) an address book on the LDAP server, select [Ext
0003 Group1 1/2
Register/Edit Address Book] from the Addr Book pull-down
0004 Group2 Address Book

0005 Group3
Detail menu.
ABC DEF GHI JKL MNO PQRS TUV WXYZ 0-9
You can change the order in which the destinations
Group
E-mail Folder FAX i-FAX
are listed by selecting [Name] or [No.] from the Sort
Cancel OK pull-down menu.
Status 08/08/2009 10:10

NOTE: To cancel the selection, press the check box


and remove the checkmark. For details on the external
address book, refer to KYOCERA COMMAND
CENTER Operation Guide.

3 Press [OK] to register the selected destination in


the destination list.

NOTE: To delete a destination in the list, select the


destination and press [Delete].

3-28
Basic Operation

Destination Search

Destinations registered in the Address Book can be searched.


Advanced search by type or by initial letter is also available.

Address Book

Addr Book Address Book Sort Name

Dest. No. Type Name Detail

3
0001 ABCD abcd@efg.com
(1) Search(Name)
0002 TUVW tuvw@xyz.com
(2) 0003 Group1 1/2
Search(No.)

Register/Edit
0004 Group2 Address Book
Detail
0005 Group3

(3) ABC DEF GHI JKL MNO PQRS TUV WXYZ 0-9

Group
(4) E-mail Folder FAX i-FAX

Cancel OK

Status 08/08/2009 10:10

Keys
Search type Subjects searched
used

1 Search by name Search by registered name.

2 Search by address Search by registered address number.


number

3 Advanced search Advanced search by initial letter of registered name.


by initial letter

4 Advanced search Advanced search by type of registered destination


by destination (E-mail, Folder (SMB/FTP), FAX, i-FAX or Group).
(FAX: Only when the optional fax kit is installed.i-FAX:
Only when the optional internet fax kit is installed).
You can set this function up so that destination types
are selected when the address book is displayed.
For more information, refer to Narrow Down
Settings on page 8-57.

The procedures for using the different search modes are explained below.

Search by name

Press [Search(Name)] and enter the required name.

Search by address number

Press [Search(No.)] and enter the address number you wish to search.

Advanced search by initial letter

Press the key for the required initial letter.

Advanced search by destination

Press any of [E-mail], [Folder], [FAX], [i-FAX] or [Group]. The destinations registered by that type are displayed.

3-29
Basic Operation

Choosing by One Touch Key


Ready to send. Destination Select the destination using the One Touch Keys.
Place original.

Destination Detail
Address
Book
In the basic screen for sending, press the One Touch
ABCD abcd@efg.com To:

TUVW 10.200.188.120 Auto 1/1


E-mail
Keys where the destination is registered.
Addr Entry

Group1 Group1
Folder Path
Entry
On Hook Direct Chain Detail/Edit Delete Recall
FAX No.
NOTE: If the One Touch Keys for the desired
Entry
0001 0002 0003 0004 0005 No. destination is hidden on the touch panel, press [ ] or
AAA BBB CCC DDD EEE i-FAX
Addr Entry [ ] to scroll and view next or previous One Touch
0006 0007 0008 0009 0010
FFF GGG HHH III JJJ
1/100
WSD Scan Keys.
Destination Quick Setup Original/Sending Color/ Advanced
This procedure assumes that One Touch Keys have
Data Format Image Quality Setup
Status 08/08/2009 10:10
already been registered.
Refer to Adding a Destination on One Touch Key on
page 8-55 for more information on adding One Touch
keys.

Choosing by Speed Dial


Ready to send. Destination Access the destination by specifying the 4-digit (0001 to
Place original.
1000) One Touch Key number (speed dial).
Destination Detail
Address
ABCD abcd@efg.com To: Book

TUVW 10.200.188.120 Auto 1/1


E-mail In the basic screen for sending, press the Quick No.
Addr Entry

Group1 Group1
Search key or [No.] and use the numeric keys to enter
Folder Path
Entry the One Touch key number in the numeric entry
On Hook Direct Chain Detail/Edit Delete Recall
FAX No.
Entry
screen.
0001 0002 0003 0004 0005 No.
AAA BBB CCC DDD EEE i-FAX
Addr Entry

FFF
0006
GGG
0007
HHH
0008
III
0009
JJJ
0010 1/100
WSD Scan NOTE: if you entered the speed dial in 1 to 3-digit,
Destination Quick Setup Original/Sending Color/ Advanced
press [OK].
Data Format Image Quality Setup
Status 08/08/2009 10:10

Sending to Different Types of Destinations (Multi Sending)


You can specify destinations that combine e-mail addresses, folders (SMB or FTP) and fax numbers (optional).
This is referred to as Multi Sending. This is useful for sending to different types of destination (e-mail addresses,
folders, etc.) in a single operation.

No. of broadcast items E-mail : Up to 100


Folders (SMP, FTP) : Total of 10 SMB and FTP
FAX : Up to 500
i-FAX : Up to 100

Also, depending on the settings, you can send and print at the same time.

Procedures are the same as used in specifying the destinations of respective types. Continue to enter E-mail
address or folder path so that they appear in the destination list. Press the Start key to launch transmission to
all destinations at one time.

3-30
Basic Operation

Using Document Box

What is Document Box?


Document Box is an area in the hard disk in which you can save documents for later retrieval or sharing among
multiple users.

Document Box contains four types of component boxes which provide the following functions. 3
Custom Box...page 6-2

Custom Box is a component box which you can create within the Document Box and store data for later retrieval.
You can create or delete a Custom Box, and manipulate data in various ways as described below:

• Creating a box...page 6-2


• Storing Documents in a Custom Box...page 6-4
• Printing a Document in a Custom Box...page 6-5
• Sending a Document from a Custom Box...page 6-6
• Moving/ Copying /Joining Documents in a Custom Box...page 6-8
• Deleting Documents in a Custom Box...page 6-11

Job Box

Job Box holds temporary or permanent print data for use with job options including Private Print, Stored Job,
Quick Copy, Proof and Hold, Repeat copy and Form Overlay which will be discussed later.
Four individual Job Boxes corresponding to these job options are already provided in the Document Box.

These Job Boxes cannot be created or deleted by a user.

NOTE: You can set up the machine so that temporary documents in job boxes are automatically deleted. For
details, refer to Automatic Delete Setting for Temporary Documents on page 6-17.

Private Print/Stored Job Box...page 6-12

In Private Printing, you can specify that a job is not printed until you release the job at the operation panel. When
sending the job from the application software, specify a 4-digit access code in the printer driver.

The job is released for printing by entering the access code on the operation panel, ensuring confidentiality of
the print job.

The data will be deleted upon completion of print job or after the main power switch is turned off.

In Hold Job, access codes are not mandatory, but can be set on the printer driver if printing with PIN security is
required. In this event, you need to enter the access code to print the stored jobs. Print data will be stored in the
hard disk after printing. This will allow printing of the same print data repeatedly.

Quick Copy/Proof and Hold Box...page 6-13

Quick Copy feature facilitates additional prints of a document already printed.

Activating Quick Copy and printing a document using the printer driver allow the print data to be stored in the
Quick Copy Job Box.

3-31
Basic Operation

When additional copies are required, you can reprint the required number of copies from the operation panel.

By default, up to 32 documents can be stored.

When power is turned off, all stored jobs will be deleted.

NOTE: When you attempt to store documents in excess of the above maximum, the oldest document data will
be overwritten by the latest document data.

The Proof and Hold feature produces only a single proof print of multiple-print job and holds printing of the
remaining copies.

Printing a multiple-print job in Proof and Hold using the printer driver allows only a single copy to be printed while
maintaining the document data in the Job Box.

To continue to print the remaining copies, use the operation panel.

You can change the number of copies to print.

Repeat Copy Box...page 6-15

Repeat Copy feature stores the copied original document data in the Job Box and allows you to print additional
copies later.

By default, up to 32 documents can be stored.

When power is turned off, the original data will be deleted.

NOTE: Repeat Copy function is not available when the optional Data Security Kit is installed.

Form for Form Overlay Box...page 6-17

Image Overlay feature copies the original document overlaid with a form or image.

This Job Box is used to store the forms or images for overlaying.

Removable Memory Box

A USB memory inserted into the USB memory slot (A1) of the machine is also recognizable as a Job Box. This
allows printing of the PDF data stored in the USB memory.

You can print PDF data directly from the USB memory without a PC.

Image files scanned using this machine can also be saved to USB memory in the PDF, TIFF, JPEG, XPS or
high compression PDF format (Scan to USB).

Fax Box

Fax Box stores the fax data received. For details, refer to the Operation Guide supplied with the fax kit.

3-32
Basic Operation

Basic Operation for Document Box


This section explains basic operations for document boxes, using examples where tasks are carried out with
custom boxes.

NOTE: In the following explanation, it is assumed that user login administration is enabled. For details on User
Logon privileges, refer to User Privileges on page 3-38.
3
The basic procedure for using document boxes is explained below.

1 Press the Document Box key.

The default document box screen appears.

Custom Box. 2 Press [Custom Box], [Job Box] or [Removable


Memory] to select the type of document box you
No. Name Owner Used Area
want to work with.
0001 SALES Anonymous ---- Search(Name)

Search(No.) In this example, press [Custom Box].


1/1 Register/Edit
Box
The box list screen appears.

You can use this screen for tasks such as


Store File Detail Open registering and editing boxes. For more information
Custom Box Job Box Removable Memory FAX Box
on using the box list, refer to Custom Box List on
Status 08/08/2009 10:10
page 3-34.

NOTE: For more information on registering boxes,


refer to Creating a New Custom Box on page 6-2.
You cannot access boxes if you forget your password.
In this event, access the machine using administrator
privileges and overwrite your box password.

Custom Box. 3 Select the box containing the document you want
to work with and press [Open].
No. Name Owner Used Area

0001 0001 Box 1 User 10% Search(Name) The document list screen appears.
0002 0002 Box 2 User 20% Search(No.)

0003 0003 Box 3 User 30%


Register/Edit
You can use this screen for tasks such as printing
1/1 Box
and sending documents. For more information on
using the document list, refer to Document List on
page 3-35.
Store File Detail Open

Custom Box Job Box Removable Memory FAX Box

Status 08/08/2009 10:10


NOTE: If a custom box is protected by a password,
enter the correct password.

3-33
Basic Operation

Custom Box List


The box list shows the registered custom boxes. The custom boxes can be listed by box number or by box name.
You can manipulate the list in a range of ways, as shown below.

Listing the boxes by number in ascending/ Listing the boxes by name in


descending order. alphabetical order.
Custom Box.
No. Name Owner Used Area

0001 0001 Box 1 User 10% Search(Name)

0002 0002 Box 2 User 20% Search(No.)


Registers new boxes and
0003 0003 Box 3 User 30%
1/1
Register/Edit checks, modifies or
Box
deletes box information.

Store File Detail Open


Opens the selected box.
Custom Box Job Box Removable Memory FAX Box

Status 08/08/2009 10:10


Displays the details for
Saves the document in the the selected box.
selected box.

3-34
Basic Operation

Document List
The document list is a list of the documents stored in the custom box. Documents can be listed either by name
or as thumbnails. The list can be used as shown below.

List
Listing the documents by name Listing the documents by time of update in Listing the documents by size in
in alphabetical order. ascending/descending order. ascending/descending order. 3
Selecting more than one Box:

document at a time.
File Name Date and Time Size

0001 0404200710574501 10/10/2008 09:40 21 MB Search(Name) Highlighting a document to


Selecting documents by display its details with [Detail].
0002 0404200710574511 10/10/2008 09:50 21 MB
checking checkboxes.
0003 0404200710574521 10/10/2008 10:00 21 MB
1/1

Detail

Preview
Previews the selected
Print Send Join Move/Copy Delete Store File document.
Close

Status 08/08/2009 10:10

Thumbnail
Switches between list display
Selecting more than one Box:
and thumbnail display.
document at a time. SALES

Search(Name)

Highlighting a document Prints, sends, joins, moves,


to display its details with 040420075501 040420075502
copies or deletes the
1/1
[Detail]. selected documents.
Detail

Preview

Selecting documents by Print Send Join Move/Copy Delete Store File


Saves the document in the
checking checkboxes.
Close open box.
Status 08/08/2009 10:10

NOTE: You can select multiple documents by pressing the respective document checkboxes. However, note
that you cannot select multiple documents when you are sending documents.

3-35
Basic Operation

Viewing/Editing Box Details


You can check and modify box information.

Use the procedure below.

1 Press [Register/Edit Box] in the box list screen.

Document Box/Removable Memory - Register/Edit Box 2 Highlight the box whose details you wish to check
or edit and press [Detail/Edit].
No. Name Owner Used Area

0001 SALES Anonymous ---- Search(Name)

Search(No.) NOTE: If a custom box is protected by a password,


1/1 Add enter the correct password.

Detail/Edit Delete

Close

Status 08/08/2009 10:10

Box: 3 Check the box details.


Box No.: Change
0001 To edit details, press [Change] of the detail you
Box Name: Change Usage Restriction: Change wish to edit. Edit the detail as desired and press
SALES 21 MB
[OK].
Box Password: Change
********

Auto File Deletion: Overwrite Setting: Change


Change
30 day(s) Permit

Free Space: Delete after Printed: Change


30 GB Off

Cancel Register

Status 08/08/2009 10:10

4 If you have changed the details, press [Register]


and then press [Yes] in the confirmation screen.

If you did not change the details, press [No].

5 Press [Close]. The display returns to the default


Document Box screen.

3-36
Basic Operation

Previewing Documents/Checking Document Details


You can use this function to preview the documents stored in a document box or display the document details
for checking.

Use the procedure below.

1 Select (highlight) a document to preview and then


press [Preview] or [Detail]. 3
2 Preview the document or check the document
details.

The operations available in the preview screen are


shown below.

When you have zoomed in, you can use these keys to move
the displayed area.
In multiple-page documents,
Preview: 2007040410574501
you can change pages by
No.
Size :
entering the desired page
Resol. : number.
Color :

1/6
In multiple-page documents,
you can use these buttons to
change pages.

Close

Status 08/08/2009 10:10

Zoom out. Zoom in.

3 When you have finished previewing documents or


checking document details, press [Close].

3-37
Basic Operation

User Privileges
When user login administration is enabled, accessibility to the Document Box components will vary depending
on the given user privilege.

Accessibilities vary depending on user privilege as follows:

Access level
Administrator User
Accessibility

Creating a box Yes No

Changing box owner Yes No


Operation
Deleting a box Others Yes No

Owner Yes Yes

Changing box Others Yes No


number
Owner Yes No

Renaming a box Others Yes No

Owner Yes Yes

Changing the Others No No


password to a box
Owner Yes Yes

Overwriting the Others Yes No


password to a box
Owner Yes No
Box information
Adjusting the box Others Yes No
capacity
Owner Yes No

Changing the owner Others Yes No

Owner Yes No

Changing the Others Yes No


permission
Owner Yes Yes

Changing the Others Yes No


period of using a
box Owner Yes Yes

Restricting the Accessibility to a Box

The accessibility to a Custom Box differs depending on the level of privileges as follows:

Administrator: An administrator can gain access and manipulate all boxes.


User: A user can gain access and manipulate his/her own boxes and the shared boxes.

3-38
Basic Operation

Password Entry Requirement

When user login administration is enabled, requirement of a password differs depending on the level of
privileges as follows:

Administrator: The administrator is not required to enter a password to gain access


to any box.
User: The user is required to enter a password to gain access to a box
which is protected by a password. The user is not required to enter a 3
password to gain access to his/her own boxes.

Creating new Custom Boxes when user login administration is enabled


Box: **
If you create a new Custom Box when user login
Box No.: Change Owner: Change
administration is enabled, the screen appears and you
0001 DCBA9876 can change the owner and permission settings. Only
Box Name: Change
Usage Restriction: Change administrators and machine administrators can create
SALES 21 GB
new Custom Boxes.
Box Password: Change Permission: Change
********** Private

Auto File Deletion: Change Overwrite Setting: Change


Changing the owner: Press [Change] of Owner and
30 day(s) Permit select the new owner for the
Free Space: Delete after Printed: Change box from the displayed list.
30 GB Off
Then press [OK].
Cancel Register Changing the permission:Press [Change] of
Status 08/08/2009 10:10
Permission and select either
[Private] or [Shared]. Then
press [OK].

NOTE: For information on specifying other settings,


refer to Creating a New Custom Box on page 6-2.

Working With User Privileges When User Login Administration is Enabled


Box: When user login administration is enabled, the owner of
Box No.: Owner:
a box with user privileges set can change the following
0001 DCBA9876 box information: the box name, the box password, the
Box Name: Change Usage Restriction: permission, the auto file deletion and the overwrite
SALES 21 MB
setting.
Box Password: Change Permission: Change
******** Private

Overwrite Setting:
Auto File Deletion: Change Change
30 day(s) Permit

Free Space: Delete after Printed: Change


30 GB Off

Cancel Register

Status 08/08/2009 10:10

NOTE: It is assumed that a custom Document Box has already been created and registered.
For information on creating/registering Document Boxes, refer to Creating a New Custom Box on page 6-2.

3-39
Basic Operation

Canceling Jobs
Follow the steps below to cancel any print or send job being executed.

Canceling Jobs
You can also cancel jobs by pressing the Stop key.

Printing jobs
1 Press the Stop key.

Cancelling job screen appears.

The current print job is temporarily interrupted.

2 Select the job you wish to cancel and press


[Cancel]. And then press [Yes] in the confirmation
screen.

Sending jobs
1 Press the Stop key.

Job Cancel appears.

NOTE: Pressing the Stop key will not temporarily stop


a job that you have already started sending.

2 To cancel printing, select [Cancel], and then press


[Yes] in the confirmation screen.

Copying... Copies NOTE:


Job No.: 000021
Scanner Setting
Job Name: Doc10102008101031 User Name: -----
Printer Setting
If Reserve Next Priority (refer to page 8-26) is set to
Scanned Pages Copies
[Off]
2 2/ 24
Letter Letter Plain
The Copying screen appears in the touch panel during
100% 2-sided printing.
2-sided Collate

Top Edge Top


1 Press the Stop key or [Cancel].
Top Tray

Cancel Reserve Next The current print job is cancelled.


Status 10/10/2008 10:10

3-40
Basic Operation

Quick Setup Screen


In the initial screen for copying and sending (the screen which appears immediately after the Copy or Send key
is first pressed after power-on), important and generally often used functions are registered from among the
versatile functions of this machine. This initial screen is called Quick Setup Screen. Registration of functions in
the Quick Setup Screen can be adjusted to suit your work environment for better efficiency.

Functions Available for Registration in the Quick Setup Screen 3


Default registrations and the functions available for registration are as follows.

Functions Available for


Function Default Registration
Registration

Copying 1: Paper Selection • Paper Selection


2: Zoom • Zoom
3: Density • Density
4: Duplex • Duplex
5: Combine • Combine
6: Staple • Staple
• Original Orientation
• Collate/Offset
• Original Image
• Original Size
• Continuous Scan

Sending 1: Zoom • Zoom


2: Scan Resolution • Scan Resolution
3: FAX TX Resolution • FAX TX Resolution
4: Density • Density
5: 2-sided/Book Original • 2-sided/Book Original
6: File Format • File Format
• Original Size
• Sending Size
• Original Orientation
• Original Image
• Color Selection
• Continuous Scan

3-41
Basic Operation

Functions Available for


Function Default Registration
Registration

Document Document 1: Color Selection • Color Selection


Box Storage 2: Resolution • Resolution
3: Density • Density
4: 2-sided/Book Original • 2-sided/Book Original
5: Original Orientation • Original Orientation
6: Original Image • Original Image
• Original Size
• Zoom
• Continuous Scan
• Storing Size

Sending 1: File Format • File Format


From Box 2: Delete after Transmitted • Delete after Transmitted
3: FAX TX Resolution • FAX TX Resolution
4: Sending Size • Sending Size

Printing 1: Paper Selection • Paper Selection


From Box 2: Delete after Printed • Delete after Printed
3: Collate/Offset • Collate/Offset
4: Duplex • Duplex
5: Staple • Staple
6: Combine • Combine

Changing Registration

Ready to copy. Copies The following procedure is one example for replacing
the registration of Density with Original Image in the
Copy Image Shortcut 1
Quick Setup Screen for copying.
Shortcut 2

Place original.
Shortcut 3

Auto 100% Normal 0


Shortcut 4
Paper Zoom Density
Original : --- Selection
Zoom : 100% Shortcut 5
Paper : --- 2-sided 2 in 1 Off
>>2-sided
Preview Duplex Combine Staple Shortcut 6

Quick Setup Org./Paper/ Color/ Layout/Edit Advanced


Finishing Image Quality Setup
Status 08/08/2009 10:10

1 Press the System Menu key.

2 Press [Copy], [Next] of Quick Setup Registration,


and then [Change] of Original Image.

3-42
Basic Operation

Copy - Original Image 3 Press [Key 3] here as the key to set replacement
Register Original Image function on the Quick Setup screen.
location.

Off

Key 1 Key 2 Key 3

Key 4 Key 5 Key 6

3
Cancel OK

Status 08/08/2009 10:10

4 Press [OK]. A confirmation screen appears. Press


[Yes]. The Original Image Quality function will be
newly registered.

3-43
Basic Operation

Program (Copying and Sending)


By registering sets of frequently used functions as a single program, you can simply press the program number
as needed to recall those functions. You can also name the programs for easy identification when recalling.

NOTE: Sending operation can be registered in the program as well. Up to 50 functions combining copying and
sending can be registered in the program.
If user login administration is enabled, you can only register functions by logging in with administrator privileges.

Registering Programs
Use the procedure below to register a program.

The following procedure is an example of registering the copying function.

1 Press the Program key while the copy mode is


accessed.

2 Press [Register] and press a number (01 to 50) for


the program number.
If entering Program screen from the Copy screen or
Send screen, go to step 4.

NOTE: If you select a program number already


registered, the currently registered functions can be
replaced with a new set of functions.

3 Check that [Copy] is selected, and press [Next].

4 Enter the new program name and press [Register]


to register the program.

Recalling Programs
Use the procedure below to recall a registered program.

1 Press the Program key.

Program recalling.
2 Press [Recall] and press the key corresponding to
the program number (01 to 50) to recall. Press the
No.
Quick No. Search key or [No.] to enter the
01 FAX 1 06
program number directly for recalling.
02 FAX 2 07

03 08
NOTE: If the program cannot be recalled, the
04 09 Document Box or the form overlay specified in the
program might have been deleted. Check the
05 10
Document Box.
Recall Register Edit

Status 08/08/2009 10:10

3-44
Basic Operation

3 Place the originals and press the Start key.


Copying is performed according to the registered
program.

Editing and Deleting Programs


You can change program number and program name, or delete program.

Use the procedure below to edit or delete a program. 3


1 Press the Program key.

2 Press [Edit] and press the key(s) corresponding to


the program number (01 to 50) to change or delete.

3 To edit a program, use the procedure for registering


a program and press [Change]. Then change the
program number and program name and press
[Register]. Choose [Yes] in the confirmation screen
to change the program.

To delete the program, press [Delete this Program].


Choose [Yes] in the confirmation screen to finally
delete the program.

3-45
Basic Operation

Registering Shortcuts (Copy, Send, and Document Box Settings)


Add shortcuts in the Quick Setup screen for easy access to the frequently used functions. A function name linked
to a registered shortcut can be changed as necessary. You can register up to 6 shortcuts for copying functions,
sending functions, and functions set for document box.

Adding Shortcuts
Shortcut registration is performed in the setup screen of each function. Shortcuts can be registered for all
functions in which [Add Shortcut] appears on the screen.

Use the procedure below to register a shortcut.

Ready to copy. Copies 1 After making the desired settings in the setup
screen of each function, press [Add Shortcut].
Memo Page
Layout
Off

Place original. Layout A


Top Top
L to R R to L None
Layout B
Border Line

Original : ---
Top Edge Top
Zoom : 100% Top Top
Paper : --- L to B R to B Original
Preview Orientation

Add Shortcut Cancel OK

Status 08/08/2009 10:10

2 Press the keys corresponding to the shortcut


number (01 to 06) to register.

NOTE: If you select a shortcut number already


registered, the currently registered shortcut can be
replaced with a new one.

3 Enter the shortcut name and press [Register] to


add the shortcut.

Editing and Deleting Shortcuts


Follow the steps as below to change shortcut number/name or delete shortcut.

1 In the setup screen of each function, press [Add


Shortcut] in the bottom of the screen.

2 Press [Edit] and press the keys corresponding to


the shortcut number (01 to 06) to change or delete.

3 To edit a shortcut, press [Change] to change the


shortcut button number and name and press [OK]
and then [Register]. Choose [Yes] in the
confirmation screen to change the shortcut.

To delete the shortcut, press [Delete this Shortcut].


Choose [Yes] in the confirmation screen to delete
the shortcut.

3-46
Basic Operation

Using the Internet Browser


This section explains how to use the Internet browser.

NOTE: To use the internet browser, internet browser must be set to [On] in Internet Browser Setting on page
8-58.

3
Launching and Exiting the Browser

Use the procedure below to launch and exit the Internet browser.

1 Press the Application key.

The application list screen appears.

Application 2 Press [Internet Browser].

The Internet browser starts up.

Internet Browser

Status 08/08/2009 10:10

3 Use the browser screen to browse web pages.

For information on how to use the browser screen,


refer to Using the Browser Screen on page 3-48.

4 To exit the browser, press [X] (Close) and then


press [Yes] in the exit confirmation screen.

The application list screen reappears.

NOTE: You can specify preferences such as the way


the Internet browser screen is displayed. For details,
refer to Internet Browser Setup (page 8-58).

3-47
Basic Operation

Using the Browser Screen

The operations available in the Internet browser screen are shown below.

Search box
Pressing the text box displays a keyboard.
You can then perform a search by entering
a keyword and pressing the [Search].
Title bar
Displays the page title. Close
Closes the Internet browser and returns
you to the application list screen.
KYOCERA MITA

Scroll bars
These allow you to scroll the
displayed page up, down, left
and right by pressing [ ], [ ],
[ ] or [ ] or by moving one of
the slide bars with your finger.

Security lock icon


Displayed when you are viewing
a protected page.
Enter URL Search Menu

Loader/Progress bar
Status 08/08/2009 10:10
Shows the status of page
loading. When the browser is
loading a web page, the loader
changes to an animated display.
Menu
Displays the browser setup menu. You can use
this menu to specify the browser's display
magnification, set the text encoding scheme
and check the server certificate.

Search (Search Internet/Retrieval in page)


Enter URL Displays a search menu in which you can select [Retrieval
Use this display a desired web in page] or an Internet search site.
page by entering the URL for Search Internet: Use the selected search site to search
that page. with the entered keyword.
Home page Retrieval in page: Search from the entered keyword in
Displays your specified home page. the currently displayed page. You can
You can set your home page in the continue your search by pressing
Browser Preferences on page 8-58. [SearchUp] or [SearchDown].

Reload
Updates the page.
Back/Forward
Displays the previous
page or the next page.

NOTE: Pressing the Reset key while the Internet browser is displayed will exit the browser and return you to
the application list screen without displaying the browser exit

3-48
4 Copying Functions
This chapter explains the functions available for copying.

• Original Size........................................................................................4-2
• Paper Selection...................................................................................4-4
• Mixed Sized Originals .........................................................................4-7
• Original Orientation ...........................................................................4-10
• Output Destination ............................................................................4-12
• Combine Mode..................................................................................4-13
• Margin/Centering Mode ....................................................................4-15
• Border Erase.....................................................................................4-17
• Booklet from Sheets..........................................................................4-19
• Cover Mode ......................................................................................4-21
• Form Overlay ....................................................................................4-22
• Page Numbering ...............................................................................4-23
• Memo Mode ......................................................................................4-25
• Image Repeat/Double Copy..............................................................4-27
• EcoPrint ............................................................................................4-29
• Sharpness Adjust..............................................................................4-30
• Continuous Scan...............................................................................4-31
• Auto Image Rotation .........................................................................4-32
• Negative Image.................................................................................4-32
• Mirror Image......................................................................................4-33
• Job Finish Notice ..............................................................................4-34
• File Name..........................................................................................4-35
• Priority Override ................................................................................4-35
• Repeat Copy .....................................................................................4-36

4-1
Copying Functions

Original Size
Specify the size of originals being scanned. Be sure to specify the original size when copying non-standard
sizes.

The following options are available.

Item How to Select Sizes

Standard Have the size of original Inch models: Auto, Ledger, Legal, Letter, Letter-R,
Sizes 1 detected automatically, or Statement, Statement-R, 8.5×13.5", Oficio II and
select from the standard 11×15"
sizes.
Metric models: Auto, A3, B4, A4,
A4-R, B5, B5-R, A5, A5-R, B6, B6-R, A6-R and Folio

Standard Select from the standard Inch models: A3, B4, A4, A4-R, B5, B5-R, A5, A5-R,
Sizes 2 sizes not included in the B6, B6-R, A6-R, Folio, 8K, 16K and 16K-R
Standard Sizes 1.
Metric models: Ledger, Legal, Letter, Letter-R,
Statement, Statement-R, 8.5×13.5", Oficio II, 11×15",
8K, 16K and 16K-R

Others Select from envelope, Hagaki, Oufuku Hagaki, Custom 1 to 4


postcard or the custom sized
originals*.

Size Entry Enter the size not included in Inch models


the standard sizes 1 and 2**. Horizontal: 2 to 17" (in 0.01" increments), Vertical: 2 to
11.69" (in 0.01" increments)

Metric models
Horizontal: 50 to 432 mm (in 1 mm increments),
Vertical: 50 to 297 mm (in 1 mm increments)

* For instructions on how to specify the custom original sizes (Custom 1 to 4), refer to
Custom Original Size Setup on page 8-4.
** The input units can be changed in the System menu.
Refer to Switching Unit of Measurement on page 8-11.

Use the procedure below to select the original size.

1 Press the Copy key.

2 Place the originals on the platen.

3 Press [Org./Paper/Finishing] and then [Original


Size].

4-2
Copying Functions

Ready to copy. Copies 4 Press [Standard Sizes 1 ], [Standard Sizes 2 ],


[Others] or [Size Entry] to select the original size.
Original Size

Standard Auto Ledger Letter


Sizes 1
Letter Legal Statement
Place original. Standard
Sizes 2
Statement 11x15" 8.5x13.5"
Others
OficioII

Size Entry
Original : ---
Zoom : 100%
Paper : ---

Preview

Status
Add Shortcut Cancel OK

08/08/2009 10:10 4
Ready to copy. Copies If [Size Entry] is selected, press [+] or [-] to specify
the horizontal size (X) and the vertical size (Y).
Original Size
X (2.00 - 17.00)
Press [# Keys] to enter the size directly using the
Standard
Sizes 1 17
"
numeric keys.
Place original. Standard
Sizes 2
# Keys
5 Press [OK].
Others
Y (2.00 - 11.69)
"
Original : --- Size Entry 11
Zoom : 100%
Paper : ---

Preview # Keys

Add Shortcut Cancel OK

Status 08/08/2009 10:10

6 Press the Start key to start copying.

4-3
Copying Functions

Paper Selection
Select the paper source that contains the required paper size.

NOTE: Specify in advance the size and type of the paper loaded in the cassette (refer to Original/Paper
Settings on page 8-4).

Selecting the Cassette


Use the procedure below to select the paper supply cassette.

1 Press the Copy key.

2 Place the originals on the platen.

3 Press [Org./Paper/Finishing] and then [Paper


Selection].

Ready to copy. Copies 4 Press the key of the paper source corresponding to
the required paper size. The cassette in which the
Paper Selection
paper is loaded is selected.

Place original.
Auto If [Auto] is selected, the paper matching the size of
Letter Letter the original is selected automatically.
Plain Plain
Ledger MP Tray

Original : ---
Plain Setting
5 Press [OK].
Letter
Zoom : 100%
Plain
Paper : ---
Letter
Preview
Plain

Add Shortcut Cancel OK

Status 08/80/2009 10:10

6 Press the Start key to start copying.

4-4
Copying Functions

Selecting the Multi Purpose Tray


Change the paper size and media type.

The available paper sizes and media types are shown in the table below.

How to
Category Item Sizes
Select

Paper Standard Choose from Inch models: Ledger, Legal, Letter, Letter-R,
Size Sizes 1 the standard Statement, 8.5×13.5", Oficio II and Executive
size.
4
Metric models: A3, B4, A4, A4-R, B5, B5-R,
A5-R, B6, B6-R, A6-R and Folio

Standard Choose from Inch models: A3, B4, A4, A4-R, B5, B5-R, A5-R,
Sizes 2 the standard B6-R, A6-R, Folio, 8K, 16K and 16K-R
sizes not
included in Metric models: Ledger, Legal, Letter, Letter-R,
the Standard Statement, 8.5×13.5", Oficio II, Executive, 8K,
Sizes 1. 16K and 16K-R

Others Choose from ISO B5, Envelope #10 (Commercial #10),


non-standard Envelope #9 (Commercial #9), Envelope #6
sizes and (Commercial #6 3/4), Envelope Monarch,
custom Envelope DL, Envelope C5, Envelope C4,
sizes. Hagaki, Oufuku Hagaki, Youkei 4, Youkei 2 and
Custom 1 to 4*

Size Enter the Inch models


Entry size not Horizontal: 5.83 to 17" (in 0.01" increments),
included in Vertical: 3.86 to 11.69" (in 0.01" increments)
the standard
sizes 1 and Metric models
2**. Vertical: 98 to 297 mm (in 1 mm increments),
Horizontal: 148 to 432 mm (in 1 mm increments)

Media Plain (105 g/m2 or less), Transparency, Rough,


Type Vellum (64 g/m2 or less), Labels, Recycled, Preprinted***, Bond, Cardstock,
Color, Prepunched***, Letterhead***,
Thick (106 g/m2 or more), Envelope, High Quality, Custom 1 to 8***
* For instructions on how to specify the custom paper sizes (Custom 1 to 4), refer to Adding
a Custom Size and Media Type for Paper to Print on page 8-4.
** The input units can be changed in the System menu.
Refer to Switching Unit of Measurement on page 8-11.
*** For instructions on how to specify the custom paper types 1 to 8, refer to Paper Weight on
page 8-7.
To print on preprinted or prepunched paper or on letterhead, refer to Special Paper
Action on page 8-10.

NOTE: You can conveniently select in advance the size and type of paper that will be used often and set them
as default (refer to Paper Size and Media Type Setup for Multi Purpose Tray on page 8-6).

4-5
Copying Functions

Use the procedure below to select the paper size and media type.

1 Press the Copy key.

2 Place the originals on the platen.

3 Press [Org./Paper/Finishing], [Paper Selection]


and then [MP Tray Setting].

Ready to copy. Copies 4 Press [Standard Sizes 1 ], [Standard Sizes 2 ],


[Others] or [Size Entry] to select the paper size.
Paper Selection - MP Tray Setting

Standard Ledger Letter Letter


Sizes 1
Legal Statement Executive
Standard
Sizes 2
8.5x13.5" OficioII
Others

Size Entry
Plain

Media Type

Cancel OK

Status 08/08/2009 10:10

Ready to copy. Copies If you select [Size Entry], press [+] or [–] to specify
X (horizontal) and Y (vertical) sizes. You can enter
Original Size
X (5.83 - 17.00)
the size directly using the numeric keys after
Standard
"
Sizes 1 17 pressing [# Keys].
Standard
Sizes 2

Others
# Keys 5 Press [Media Type].
Y (3.86 - 11.69)
"
Size Entry 11
Plain

Media Type
# Keys

Cancel OK

Status 08/08/2009 10:10

6 Select paper type, and press [OK].

7 Press [OK].

8 Press [OK].

9 Press the Start key to start scanning the originals.

10 When the machine is ready, the confirmation


screen for the specified paper appears. Load the
required paper in the multi purpose tray and press
[Continue] to start copying.

4-6
Copying Functions

Mixed Sized Originals


Using the optional document processor, the originals of different sizes can be loaded in a batch and copied. In
this operation, up to 30 originals of different sizes can be placed in the document processor at the same time.

Supported Combinations of Originals

Originals of the Same Width

The supported combinations of originals are as follows.

Ledger and Letter (A3 and A4)


4

Ledger Letter Letter Ledger

Ledger and Letter-R (Folio and A4-R)

Legal Letter-R Letter-R


Legal

B4 and B5

4-7
Copying Functions

Originals of Different Widths

Place all originals of different widths. The supported combinations of originals are as follows.

NOTE: When mixing the original sizes as using the following combination: Folio, A4-R, and B5-R, make sure
to set the System Menu key -> Common Settings -> Original / Paper Settings -> Original Auto Detect to [On]
for [Folio].
For more information, refer to Automatic Detection of Originals (Available for metric models only) on page 8-9.

A3, B4, A4 and B5

B4, A4-R and B5

Folio, A4-R and B5-R

4-8
Copying Functions

Selecting How to Copy Originals


Select whether you wish to create individual copies on different size paper matching the original sizes or to
produce all copies on the same size paper.

NOTE: This function is available regardless of whether originals have the same width or not.

The table below shows the finished document sizes for the different original size options.

Option Description 4
Mixed Size Copies Originals are detected individually for size and
copied to the same size paper as originals.

Same Size Copies Originals are all copied to the same size paper.

Use the procedure below to copy mixed size originals.

1 Press the Copy key.

2 Place originals on the document processor.

IMPORTANT: When placing originals of different


widths, be sure to flush them against the document
width guide toward the back of the machine.

3 Press [Org./Paper/Finishing] and then [Mixed Size


Originals].

Ready to copy. Copies 4 Select [Mixed Size Copies] or [Same Size Copies]
as finish size.
Mixed Size Originals
Original Width
Off
5 Select the combination of originals from [Same
Place original. Mixed Size
Same Width Different
Width] and [Different Width].
Copies
Width
When [Same Size Copies] is selected, select [Long
Same Size
Copies
Top Page Direction Edge Left] or [Short Edge Left] as the first original
Original : --- orientation.
Zoom : 100%
Paper : --- Long Edge Short Edge

Preview
Left Left
6 Press [OK].
Add Shortcut Cancel OK

Status 08/08/2009 10:10

7 Press the Start key to start copying.

4-9
Copying Functions

Original Orientation
Select the original orientation to use the following functions.

• Zoom (XY Zoom)


• Duplex
• Margin/Centering originals
• Border erase
• Combine mode
• Memo mode
• Page numbering
• Booklets
• Stapling (optional feature)
* If [On] is selected as the Orientation Confirmation on page 8-14 setting in the System Menu, the selection
screen for original orientation appears when you select any of the above functions.

When placing originals on the platen

Original [Top Edge Top] [Top Edge Left]

When placing originals on the optional document processor

Original [Top Edge Top] [Top Edge Left]

NOTE: To change the default setting for the original orientation, refer to Original Orientation on page 8-15.

4-10
Copying Functions

Use the procedure below to select the orientation when placing the originals on the platen.

1 Press the Copy key.

2 Place the originals on the platen.

3 Press [Org./Paper/Finishing] and then [Original


Orientation].

Ready to copy. Copies 4 Select [Top Edge Top] or [Top Edge Left] as the way
the original is oriented.
Original Orientation

Select the orientation of the


original document's top edge. 5 Press [OK].
4
Place original.

Original : ---
Top Edge Top Top Edge Left
Zoom : 100%
Paper : ---

Preview

Add Shortcut Cancel OK

Status 08/08/2009 10:10

6 Press the Start key to start copying.

4-11
Copying Functions

Output Destination
You can use the procedure below to select an output destination such as the optional document finisher for your
copies.

NOTE: Optional output destinations include the job separator, built-in finisher, and document finisher.

The table below shows the available output destinations.

Destination Description

Top tray Top tray of the machine (where copies are stored)

Finisher Tray* Tray of the optional built-in finisher or document finisher

Job Separator Tray Optional job separator


* Copy output orientation can be selected either as face-up (print facing up) or face-
down (print facing down).

NOTE: To change default destination for copies, refer to Paper Output on page 8-13 for details.

Use the procedure below to select the output destination.

1 Press the Copy key.

2 Place the originals on the platen.

3 Press [Org./Paper/Finishing] and then [Paper


Output].

Ready to copy. Copies 4 Select the output destination for finished copies.

Paper Output When you select [Finisher Tray], select the


Face Up
orientation of output copy, Face Up (print facing up)
Place original.
or Face Down (print facing down).
Face Down

Top Tray Tray A Tray B Tray C


5 Press [OK].
Original : ---
Job Separator Tray 1 Tray 2 Tray 3
Zoom : 100% Tray
Paper : ---
Tray 4 Tray 5 Tray 6 Tray 7
Preview

Add Shortcut Cancel OK


Status 08/08/2009 10:10

6 Press the Start key to start copying.

4-12
Copying Functions

Combine Mode
This mode allows you to copy 2 or 4 originals combined onto a single page. 2-in-1 mode or 4-in-1 mode. The
page boundary of each original can be indicated.

NOTE: Combine mode is available for the copy paper sizes of A3, B4, Folio, A4, A4-R, B5, B5-R, A5-R,
Ledger, Legal, Oficio II, 8.5×13.5", Letter, Letter-R, Statement-R, 8K, 16K and 16K-R.

2-in-1 Mode
For copying two originals onto a single sheet. This mode can be used with Duplex mode to copy four originals
4
onto one sheet.
The following 2-in-1 options and output orientations are available.
Original Copy Orientation of Original
Platen Document processor

NOTE: When placing the original on the platen, be sure to copy the originals in page order.

4-in-1 Mode
For copying four originals onto a single sheet. This mode can be used with Duplex mode to copy eight originals
onto one sheet.

The following 4-in-1 options and output orientations are available.


Original Copy Orientation of Original
Platen Document processor

NOTE: When placing the original on the platen, be sure to copy the originals in page order.

4-13
Copying Functions

Types of Page Boundary Lines


The following types of the boundary lines are available.

None Solid Dotted Borders


(Cropmark)

The procedure for using Combine mode copying is explained below.

1 Press the Copy key.

2 Place the originals on the platen.

3 Press [Layout/Edit] and then [Combine].

Ready to copy. Copies 4 Press [2 in 1] or [4 in 1], and choose the page layout
of Layout.
Combine
Layout
Off
5 Press [Border Line] to choose the type of the lines
Place original. 2 in 1 to indicate page boundaries. Press [OK].
Right then Left then
Down Down None
4 in 1
Border Line
6 Press [Original Orientation] to choose orientation of
Original : ---
the originals, either [Top Edge Top] or [Top Edge
Top Edge Top
Zoom
Paper
: 100%
: ---
Down then
Right
Down then
Left
Left]. Then press [OK].
Original
Preview Orientation

Add Shortcut Cancel OK


7 Press [OK].
Status 08/08/2009 10:10

8 Press the Start key. Copying begins.

If the original is placed on the platen, replace the


original and press the Start key.

After scanning all originals, press [Finish Scan] to


start copying.

4-14
Copying Functions

Margin/Centering Mode
Shift the original image to make space on the copy for binding on the left (right) or top (bottom) side.

When you copy onto paper different from the original size, you can center the original image on the paper.

The following margin widths are available.

Input units Margin Width

Inch Models -0.75 to 0.75" (in 0.01" increments)


4
Metric Models -18 mm to 18 mm (in 1-mm increments)

Margin on the Back Side


When duplex copying, you can also specify the margin on the back side.

Auto

When [Auto] is selected, an appropriate margin is applied automatically on the rear page depending on a margin
specified for the front page and a binding orientation.

Separate Front/Back Margins

Enables you to specify the front and back settings separately.

NOTE: You can set the default margin width. Refer to Margin Default on page 8-20 for details.

Use the procedure below to make copies with margins.

1 Press the Copy key.

2 Place the originals on the platen.

3 Press [Layout/Edit] and then [Margin/Centering].

Ready to copy.
Copies 4 Press [Margin] to select the copy with margin.

Margin/Centering
Left/Right (-18 - +18)
Use [+] or [–] to enter the margins for Left/Right and
Off
0 " Top/Bottom. Press [# Keys] to use the numeric
Place original.
Margin keys for entry.
Auto
# Keys
Centering
Top/Bottom (-0.75 - +0.75) Back Page
For duplex copying, press [Back Page] and select
Original : --- 0 " [Auto] or [Manual].
Top Edge Top
Zoom : 100%
Paper : ---
Original
Preview # Keys Orientation

Add Shortcut Cancel OK

Status 08/08/2009 10:10

4-15
Copying Functions

Copies If you selected [Auto], press [OK]. If you pressed


Ready to copy.
[Manual], enter the margins in the displayed screen
Margin/Centering - Back Page
Left/Right (-0.75 - +0.75)
and then press [OK].
Auto "
0.25
Place original. Manual

# Keys

Top/Bottom (-0.75 - +0.75)


"
Original : ---
0.25
Zoom : 100%
Paper : ---

Preview # Keys

Add Shortcut Cancel OK

Status 08/08/2009 10:10

Ready to copy. Copies Press [Centering] to center the original image on


the paper.
Margin/Centering

Off
5 Press [Original Orientation] to choose orientation of
Place original. Margin the originals, either [Top Edge Top] or [Top Edge
Left]. Then press [OK].
Centering

Original : ---
6 Press [OK].
Top Edge Top
Zoom : 100%
Paper : ---
Original
Preview Orientation

Add Shortcut Cancel OK

Status 08/08/2009 10:10

7 Press the Start key to start copying.

4-16
Copying Functions

Border Erase
Use Border Erase to remove black shadows that appear around the outside of the original when making copies.
The following options can be selected.

Border Erase Sheet


Erases black borders around the single sheet original.

4
Original Copy

Border Erase Book


Erases black borders around the edges and in the
middle of the original such as a thick book. You can
specify the widths individually to erase the borders
around the edges and in the center of the book.

Original Copy

Individual Border Erase


Specify border erase widths individually for all edges.

Original Copy

In each option, the available ranges are as below.

Input units Border Erase Range

Inch Models 0 to 2"(in 0.01" increments)

Metric Models 0 mm to 50 mm (in 1-mm increments)

NOTE: To specify the default width value of Border Erase, refer to Border Erase Default on page 8-19 for
details.

4-17
Copying Functions

Border Erase to Back Page


When scanning a 2-sided original, this allows you to erase the borders on the back of the original. The table
below shows the available settings.

Item Detail

Same as Front Border Erase performed using the same setting


Page as the front page

Do Not Erase No Border Erase performed on the back page

NOTE: You can change the default setting for Border Erase to Back Page. For details, refer to Paper
Selection on page 8-25.

Use the procedure below to erase borders when copying.

1 Press the Copy key.

2 Place the originals on the platen.

3 Press [Layout/Edit] and then [Border Erase].

Ready to copy. Copies 4 Select [Border Erase Sheet] to erase borders for an
individual sheet or [Border Erase Book] to erase
Border Erase
Border (-0.75 - +0.75)
borders for a book.
Off
"
0.25

Place original. Border Erase Use [+] or [–] to enter the width in Border or Gutter.
Sheet

# Keys
Same as Press [# Keys] to use the numeric keys for entry.
Border Erase Front Page
Book Back Page
Gutter (-0.75 - +0.75)
"
Original : --- Individual 0.25
Border Erase
Zoom : 100%
Paper : ---

Preview # Keys

Add Shortcut Cancel OK

Status 08/08/2009 10:10

Ready to copy. Copies Press [Individual Border Erase] to select the


individual border erase.
Border Erase
(0.00 - 2.00)
Off
Top 0.25 " Use [+] or [–] to enter the width in Top, Bottom, Left
Place original. Border Erase
"
or Right. Press [# Keys] to use the numeric keys for
Sheet Bottom 0.25
Same as entry.
Border Erase " Front Page
Book
Left 0.25
Back Page

Original : --- Individual Right 0.25 " Press [Original Orientation] to select the original
Border Erase Top Edge Top
Zoom
Paper
: 100%
: ---
orientation from either [Top Edge Top] or [Top Edge
Original
Preview # Keys Orientation Left]. Then press [OK].
Add Shortcut Cancel OK

Status 08/08/2009 10:10


For 2-sided originals, press [Back Page] and then
press [Same as Front Page] or [Do Not Erase].

5 Press [OK].

6 Press the Start key to start copying.

4-18
Copying Functions

Booklet from Sheets


The Booklet copying option allows you to copy sheet originals and produce booklets such as small brochures
or pamphlets. A booklet, such as a magazine, is made by folding at the center.

You can copy the cover page onto colored paper or thick paper. Paper for the cover is supplied from the multi
purpose tray. To feed the cover paper from the cassette, refer to Paper Source for Cover Paper on page 8-10.

The supported original and paper sizes are as follows.

Type of Original Original Size Paper Size 4


One-sided original, All* A3, B4, A4, A4-R, B5, B5-R, A5, A5-R,
Two-sided original Ledger, Legal, Letter and Letter-R

All* A3, B4, A4-R, Ledger, Legal and Letter-R

Book original A3, B4, A4-R, B5-R, A5-R, A4, A4-R, B5, B5-R, Letter and Letter-R
Ledger, Letter-R and 8K

A3, B4, A4-R, B5-R, A5-R, A4-R and Letter-R


Ledger and Letter-R
* Except for custom sized originals.

For binding on the left side


The folded copies can be read from left to right.

Original Copy

For binding on the right side


The folded copies can be read from right to left.

Original Copy

For top binding


The folded copies can be read from top to bottom.

Original Copy

The procedure for using Booklet copying is explained below.

1 Press the Copy key.

4-19
Copying Functions

2 Place the originals on the platen.

3 Press [Layout/Edit] and then [Booklet].

Ready to copy. Copies 4 Press [1-sided>>Booklet] to produce a booklet


from single-sided originals.
Booklet
Original
Off
Binding
Off
Press [2-sided>>Booklet] to produce a booklet
Left/Right Cover
Place original. 1-sided Binding
from two-sided originals.
>>Booklet Top
Off
2-sided
>>Booklet
Finishing
Binding
Saddle Press [Book>>Booklet] to produce a booklet from
Stitch
Original : --- Book
Left an open book original.
>>Booklet Binding Top Edge Top
Zoom : 100%
Right
Paper : ---
Original
Binding
Preview Orientation
Top

Add Shortcut Cancel OK


Status 08/08/2009 10:10

5 If you selected [2-sided>>Booklet] or


[Book>>Booklet], choose the binding orientation in
Finishing.

If you selected [1-sided>>Booklet], choose the


binding orientation in Finishing.

6 If you choose [1-sided>>Booklet],


[2-sided>>Booklet], or [Book>>Booklet] you can
add the cover. Press [Cover], select [Cover] and
press [OK].

7 Press [Original Orientation] to choose orientation of


the originals, either [Top Edge Top] or [Top Edge
Left]. Then press [OK].

8 Press [OK].

9 Platen and press the Start key. Copying begins.

NOTE: When using the platen, be sure to place the


originals in page order.

If the originals are placed on the platen,


consecutively replace each original after pressing
the Start key.

After scanning all originals, press [Finish Scan] to


start copying.

4-20
Copying Functions

Cover Mode
Add a cover to the finished copies. You can copy the first page and/or the last page onto colored paper or thick
paper fed from the different paper source than the regular one. The following two options are available. Paper
for the cover is supplied from the multi purpose tray.
To feed the cover paper from the cassette, refer to Paper Source for Cover Paper on page 8-10.

Type of Cover Description

Front Cover First page of the originals is copied on a different


paper. 4
Front and Back First page and last page of the originals are
Covers copied on different paper.

The procedure for using Cover mode copying is explained below.

1 Press the Copy key.

2 Place the originals on the platen.

3 Press [Layout/Edit] and then [Cover].

Ready to copy. Copies 4 Press [Front Cover] or [Front and Back Covers].

Cover 5 Press [OK].


Print cover pages on the different type of
paper, using a different paper source.
Select either [Front Cover] or
Place original. [Front and Back Covers].
*Set paper source for cover in System Menu.

Original : ---
Off Front Cover Front and Back
Zoom : 100%
Covers
Paper : ---

Preview

Add Shortcut Cancel OK

Status 08/08/2009 10:10

6 Press the Start key. Copying begins.

If the originals are placed on the platen,


consecutively replace each original after pressing
the Start key.

After scanning all originals, press [Finish Scan] to


start copying.

4-21
Copying Functions

Form Overlay
Copy the original images onto the form. Once you scan
and register the form, the form is overlaid onto the
original. You can also use a form that is already
registered in the machine's memory.

Forms Original Copy


NOTE: To register a form in advance, refer to Form for
Form Overlay Box on page 6-17 for details.

Follow the steps as below for form overlay.

1 Press the Copy key.

2 Press [Layout/Edit] and then [Form Overlay].

Ready to copy. Copies 3 Press [Scan New Form] to use the first page of
originals as a form.
Form Overlay
Density (10 - 100)
Off
10 %

Place original. Select


NOTE: Press [+] or [–] in [Density] to adjust the
Stored Form
density of the form. Choose from ten levels in 10%
Scan
New Form increments.
Original : ---
Zoom : 100% None
Paper : ---
Select
Preview Form

Add Shortcut Cancel OK

Status 08/08/2009 10:10

Ready to copy. Copies To use the forms already registered, press [Select
Stored Form]. Press [Select Form] to display the
Form Overlay - Select Form
document boxes that store documents which can
Document Box
be used as a form. Select the desired form from the
Box Name
Up
list and press [OK].
Form for Form Overlay

Custom Box
Detail
1/1
NOTE: To return to a higher level folder, press [Up].
Preview

Open

Cancel OK

Status 08/08/2009 10:10

4 Press [OK].

5 Place the originals.

Place the original for the form on top of the other


originals. When using the optional document
processor, the first page of the originals should be
placed on the top.

6 Press the Start key to start copying.

4-22
Copying Functions

Page Numbering
Number multiple pages of originals in sequential order. The formats for numbering are [-1-], [P.1] or [1/n]. The
format [1/n] prints the total number of pages in the place of n.

Select Top Left, Top Middle, Top Right, Bottom Left, Bottom Middle or Bottom Right as the page numbering
position.

Original [ – 1 –] [P.1] [1/n]

Use the procedure below to insert page numbers on your copies.

1 Press the Copy key.

2 Place the originals in the document processor or on


the platen.

3 Press [Layout/Edit] and then [Page #].

Ready to copy. Copies 4 Select the numbering format from [-1-], [P.1] or
[1/n].
Page #

Auto
Off Position
Top Top Top
5 Select the page numbering position.
Left Middle Right Last Page
-1-
Bottom
Left
Bottom
Middle
Bottom
Right Auto 6 To start page numbering from a page other than the
P.1
1st Page (1 - 10) Start # (1 - 999) Denominator first page, press [+] or [–] of 1st Page and select the
#
1/n 1 1
Top Edge Top
starting page. You can also enter the number with
Original
the numeric keys after pressing [# Keys].
# Keys # Keys Orientation

Cancel OK

Status 08/08/2009 10:10

7 To start the numbering with a number other than 1,


press [+] or [–] of Start Number and enter the
starting number. You can also enter the number
with the numeric keys after pressing [# Keys].

8 If you do not want page numbering through to the


last page, press [Last Page]. Select Manual and
use [+] or [-] to enter the final page to be numbered
(a negative number of pages counting backwards
from the last page). Then press [OK]. You can set a
value up to -10. You can also enter the number with
the numeric keys after pressing [# Keys].

4-23
Copying Functions

9 The total number of pages n in the format [1/n] can


be changed manually. Press [Denominator #] and
select [Manual]. Press [+] or [–] to enter the total
number of pages and press [OK]. You can also
enter the number with the numeric keys after
pressing [# Keys].

10 Press [Original Orientation] to choose orientation of


the originals, either [Top Edge Top] or [Top Edge
Left]. Press [OK].

11 Press [OK].
12 Press the Start key to start copying.

4-24
Copying Functions

Memo Mode
Delivers copies with a space for adding notes. You can also copy two originals onto the same sheet with a space
or add lines to indicate page boundaries.

NOTE: Memo mode is available for the copy paper sizes of Ledger, Legal, Oficio II, 8.5×13.5", Letter, Letter-R,
Statement-R, A3, B4, Folio, A4, A4-R, B5, B5-R, A5-R, 8K, 16K and 16K-R.

Layout A
Reduces images of each original page for printing onto
4
half of a page, leaving the other half blank for notes.

Original Copy

Layout B
Reduces images of two original pages for copying onto
half of a single page, leaving the other half blank for
notes.

Original Copy

4-25
Copying Functions

Types of Page Boundary Lines


The following boundary lines are available.

None Solid Dotted Borders


(Cropmark)

Use the procedure below to insert page boundary lines on your copies.

1 Press the Copy key.

2 Place the originals on the platen.

3 Press [Layout/Edit] and then [Memo Page].

Ready to copy. Copies 4 Press [Layout A] or [Layout B]. Select the page
layout from Layout.
Memo Page
Layout
Off
5 Press [Border Line] to select the page boundary
Place original. Layout A line. Press [OK].
Top Top
L to R R to L None
Layout B
Border Line
6 Press [Original Orientation] to select orientation of
Original : ---
the originals, either [Top Edge Top] or [Top Edge
Top Edge Top
Zoom
Paper
: 100%
: ---
Top
L to B
Top
R to B
Left]. Press [OK].
Original
Preview Orientation

Add Shortcut Cancel OK


7 Press [OK].
Status 08/08/2009 10:10

8 Press the Start key to start copying.

4-26
Copying Functions

Image Repeat/Double Copy


Tiles the 1 copied sheet with an original image. You can
also specify the area of the original to repeat.

Image Repeat
Copies the original image multiple times onto 1 sheet at
a specified magnification.

You can also specify how much of the original is


4
repeatedly copied.

Original Copy

Double Copy
Makes 2 copies of the same original on a single sheet.

For example, you can double-copy an A4 original onto


an A3 sheet which you then cut in half to make 2 copies
that are identical to the original.

Original Copy

Follow the steps as below to use Image Repeat/Double Copy.

1 Press Copy key.

2 Place the originals on the platen.

3 Press [Layout/Edit] and then press [Image Repeat].

Ready to copy. Copies 4 Press [Zoom Priority].

Image Repeat To make double copies, press [Double Copy] and


(25 - 400)
Off
100 %
proceed to step 8.
Place original. Zoom
Priority
# Keys
5 Press [+] or [–] to set the zoom size.
Double
Copy
Press [# Keys] to enter with numeric keys.
Original : ---
Off
Zoom : 100%
Paper : ---

Preview
Specify
Repeat Area
6 To set the area of the original to be repeated, press
[On] for Specify Repeat Area.
Add Shortcut Cancel OK

Status 08/08/2009 10:10

4-27
Copying Functions

7 Press [+] or [–] to input the area of the original to be


repeated.

With metric models, you can enter the border width


directly using the numeric keys after pressing [#-
Keys].

Y1: Length from top left of platen to top edge of


repeat area

X1: Length from Height from top left of platen to left


edge of repeat area

Y2: Height of repeat area

X2: Width of repeat area

8 Press [OK].

9 Press the Start key. Copying begins.

4-28
Copying Functions

EcoPrint
Use EcoPrint to save toner when printing. Use this function for test copies or any other occasion where high
quality print is unnecessary.

The procedure for making copies using EcoPrint is explained below.

1 Press the Copy key.

2 Place the originals on the platen.

3 Press [Image Quality] and then [EcoPrint]. 4


Ready to copy. Copies 4 Press [On].

EcoPrint 5 Press [OK].


Conserve toner when printing.
Use EcoPrint for test copies
and other situations where high-quality
Place original. copies are not necessary.

Original : ---
Off On
Zoom : 100%
Paper : ---

Preview

Add Shortcut Cancel OK

Status 08/08/2009 10:10

6 Press the Start key to start copying.

4-29
Copying Functions

Sharpness Adjust
Adjust the sharpness of image outlines. When copying penciled originals with rough or broken lines, clear copies
can be taken by adjusting sharpness toward [Sharpen]. When copying images made up of patterned dots such
as magazine photos, in which moire* patterns appear, edge softening and weakening of the moire effect can be
obtained by setting the sharpness toward [Unsharpen].

* Patterns that are created by irregular distribution of halftone dots.

Follow the steps below to adjust sharpness.

1 Press Copy key.

2 Place the originals on the platen.

3 Press [Image Quality] and then Press [Sharpness].

Ready to copy. Copies 4 Press [-3] to [3] (Unsharpen - Sharpen) to adjust


the sharpness.
Sharpness

5 Press [OK].
Place original.
Unsharpen Sharpen

-3 -2 -1 0 +1 +2 +3
Original : ---
Zoom : 100%
Paper : ---

Preview

Add Shortcut Cancel OK


Status 08/08/2009 10:10

6 Press the Start key. Copying begins.

4-30
Copying Functions

Continuous Scan
When a large number of originals cannot be placed in the document processor at one time, the originals can be
scanned in separate batches and then copied as one job. With this function, originals are scanned until you
press [Scan Finish].

Any of the following settings can be changed during scanning.

• Original size selection • Zoom


• Original orientation • Border erase
• Image quality selection • Density 4
• Type of original (2-sided/book original) • Color Selection

If you use Job Build, you can insert a blank paper during scanning or a blank page during duplex copying.

The procedure for making copies using Continuous Scan is explained below.

1 Press the Copy key.

2 Press [Advanced Setup] and then [Continuous


Scan].

Ready to copy. Copies 3 If Continuous Scan is selected, press [On].

Continuous Scan If Job Build is selected, press [Job Build] and select
Off Select desired binding orientation.
desired binding orientation.
Place original. On
4 Press [OK].
Job Build

Original : ---
Zoom : 100%
Paper : --- Binding Binding Binding
Left Right Top
Preview

Add Shortcut Cancel OK

Status 08/08/2009 10:10

Scan next original(s).


Place the originals and press Start key.
Copies 5 Place the originals in the document processor or on
Press [Finish Scan] to start copying. the platen and press the Start key.
Job No.: 000021 Job Name: doc20080505113414 User Name: -----
Scanner Setting Finishing
If [Job Build] is selected, the next page can be
pages
Original Original Original
changed. Press [Sheet Insertion] to insert a blank
Size Orientation Image Next Copy: On Front paper. Press [Next Copy: On Back] in duplex
copying to print the next page on back page.
2-sided/Book Zoom Border Erase
Original Next Copy:
On Back

Sheet
Density Insertion
1/2

Cancel Finish Scan

Status 08/08/2009 10:10

6 Place the next original and press the Start key.


Repeat these steps to scan the remaining originals.

After scanning all originals, press [Finish Scan] to


start copying.

4-31
Copying Functions

Auto Image Rotation


Automatically rotates the image when the sizes of the original and the loaded paper matches but the orientations
are different. The images will be rotated 90° counter-clockwise prior to copying.

NOTE: To set Auto Image Rotation as the default mode, refer to Auto Image Rotation on page 8-21.

The procedure for making copies using Auto Image Rotation is explained below.

1 Press the Copy key.

2 Place the originals on the platen.

3 Press [Advanced Setup] and then [Auto Image


Rotation].

4 Press [On] to select Auto Image Rotation.

5 Press [OK].

6 Press the Start key to start copying.

Negative Image
Inverts black and white portions of the image for printing.

NOTE: This function is only available for black and white copy mode.

Use the procedure below to make negative image copies.

1 Press the Copy key.

2 Place the originals on the platen.

3 Press [Advanced Setup] and then [Negative


Image].

4 Press [On] to select Negative Image.

5 Press [OK].

6 Press the Start key to start copying.

4-32
Copying Functions

Mirror Image
Copies the mirrored image of the original.

NOTE: This function is only available for black and white copy mode.

Use the procedure below to make mirror image copies.

1 Press the Copy key.

2 Place the originals on the platen.


4
3 Press [Advanced Setup] and then [Mirror Image].

4 Press [On] to select Mirror Image.

5 Press [OK].

6 Press the Start key to start copying.

4-33
Copying Functions

Job Finish Notice


Sends a notice by e-mail when a job is completed. User can be notified of the completion of a copy job while
working at a remote desk, saving the time spent waiting beside the machine for copying to finish.

NOTE: PC should be configured in advance so that E-mail can be used.

Example of Job Finish Notice

To: h_pttr@owl-net.net
Subject: 1234 Job end report mail
Job No.: 000002
Result: OK
End Time: Wed 27 Apr 2005 14:56:08
File Name: doc27042005145608
Job Type: Copy
------------------------------------------------
1234

Use the procedure below to enable job finish notification when making copies.
1 Press the Copy key.
2 Place the originals on the platen.

3 Press [Advanced Setup] and then [Job Finish Notice].

Ready to copy. Copies 4 To select the destination from the address book,
press [Address Book] on the left of the screen and
Job Finish Notice
then press [Address Book] in the next screen. Select
Off
the destination to be notified, then press [OK].
Address Book Destination Detail You can view information on the notification
User A abc@def.com
Address
destination by pressing [Detail].
Entry

Detail Address Book

Add Shortcut Cancel OK

Status 08/08/2009 10:10

Ready to copy. Copies To directly enter the E-mail address, press


[Address Entry]. Press [E-mail Address], enter the
Job Finish Notice
address and press [OK].
Off

Address Book
E-mail
Address 5 Press [OK].
Address
Entry 6 Press the Start key to start copying. Upon
completion of the job, an E-mail notice is sent to the
selected destination.

Add Shortcut Cancel OK

Status 08/08/2009 10:10

4-34
Copying Functions

File Name
Names a copy job. Add other information such as date and time or job number as necessary. You can check a
job history or job status using the job name, date and time, or job number specified here.

Use the procedure below to assign a name to your copy job.

1 Press the Copy key.

2 Place the originals on the platen.

3 Press [Advanced Setup] and then [File Name Entry]. 4


Ready to copy. Copies 4 Press [File Name], enter the name for a copy job,
and press [OK].
File Name Entry

Add a file name.


Additional information such as Job No.
To add date and time, press [Date and Time]. To
and Date and Time can also be set.
add job number, [Job No.]. Added information is
File Name
doc displayed in Additional Info.
Additional Info
Job No.

Job No. Date and Time


NOTE: The maximum length of the file name is
32 characters.
Add Shortcut Cancel OK

Status 08/08/2009 10:10

5 Press [OK].

6 Press the Start key to start copying.

Priority Override
Suspends a current job and gives the selected job priority for copying. The suspended job resumes after Priority
Override copying is finished.

NOTE: The current job that is selected as Priority Override cannot be suspended.

The procedure for using Priority Override is explained below.

1 Press the Copy key.

2 Place the originals on the platen.

3 Press [Advanced Setup] and then [Priority


Override].

4 Press [On] to select Priority Override.

5 Press [OK].

6 Press the Start key. The current copy job is


suspended and the copy job selected in Priority
Override starts. The suspended job resumes after
Priority Override copying is finished.

4-35
Copying Functions

Repeat Copy
Enable additional copies in the desired quantity as necessary after a copy job is completed. For confidential
documents, you can set up a pass code for the use of Repeat Copy. In such a case, the correct pass code must
be entered when using Repeat Copy or copies will not be delivered.

IMPORTANT: A Repeat Copy job is cleared when the main power switch is turned off.

Repeat Copy is not available when the machine is equipped with the optional Data Security Kit.

Repeat Copy cannot be used when the maximum number of Repeat Copy jobs to retain in the document box is
set to zero (refer to Maximum Number of Repeat Copy Jobs Retained on page 4-37).

You can select Repeat Copy as default setting. Refer to Repeat Copying on page 8-23.

Giving a file name to a copy job will facilitate identification of the data when copying (refer to File Name on page
4-35).

Selecting Repeat Copy


Use the procedure below to select repeat copying.

1 Press the Copy key.

2 Place the originals on the platen.

3 Press [Advanced Setup] and then [Repeat Copy].

Ready to copy. Copies 4 Press [On].

Repeat Copy To register a password, press [# Keys] and enter a


Off
Password(4digits)
4-digit password.
Place original. On

# Keys
IMPORTANT: If you forget the pass code, Repeat Copy
Original : ---
will be unavailable. Make a note of the pass code
Zoom
Paper
: 100%
: ---
beforehand if necessary.
Preview

Add Shortcut Cancel OK

Status 08/08/2009 10:10

5 Press [OK].

6 Press the Start key to start copying and register


this job as a Repeat Copy job.

4-36
Copying Functions

Outputting Repeat Copy Jobs


The Repeat Copy jobs are stored in the Document Box. Refer to Job Box on page 3-31 to print out the Repeat
Copy jobs.

Maximum Number of Repeat Copy Jobs Retained


You can use the procedure below to change the maximum number of copy jobs that can be retained in the
document box.

Use the procedure below to change the maximum number of copy jobs retained.
4
1 Press the System Menu key.

2 Press [Document Box/Removable Memory] and


then [Next] of Job Box.

3 Press [Change] of Repeat Copy Job Retention.

Document Box/Removable Memory - Repeat Copy Job Retention


4 Use the [+] or [-] key to enter the maximum
Set the maximum number of repeat copy jobs to retain. retention number.
Use [-]/[+] or the numeric keys to enter a number.
*Set this number to 0 to not retain any jobs.

You can also enter the number from the numeric


keys.
(0 - 50)

32 job(s)
A number between 0 and 50 can be entered as the
number of retained jobs.

NOTE: If you enter a value of 0 (zero), you cannot use


Cancel OK

Status 08/08/2009 10:10


the Repeat Copy function.

5 Press [OK].

4-37
Copying Functions

4-38
5 Sending Functions

This chapter explains the functions available for sending originals.

• Original Size Selection........................................................................5-2


• Sending Size Selection .......................................................................5-3
• Zoom...................................................................................................5-5
• Centering ............................................................................................5-6
• Mixed Sized Originals .........................................................................5-7
• 1-sided/2-sided Selection..................................................................5-10
• Original Orientation ...........................................................................5-11
• File Format........................................................................................5-12
• File Separation..................................................................................5-13
• PDF Encryption Functions ................................................................5-14
• Image Quality....................................................................................5-16
• Adjusting Density ..............................................................................5-17
• Scan Resolution................................................................................5-18
• Sharpness.........................................................................................5-19
• Background Density Adjustment.......................................................5-20
• Color / Grayscale / Black and White Selection .................................5-21
• Continuous Scan...............................................................................5-22
• Border Erase.....................................................................................5-23
• Enter Document Name/File Name ....................................................5-25
• Enter E-mail Subject and Body .........................................................5-26
• WSD Scan ........................................................................................5-27
• Job Finish Notice ..............................................................................5-29
• Send and Print ..................................................................................5-30
• Send and Store .................................................................................5-30
• FTP Encrypted TX ............................................................................5-31
• Color Type.........................................................................................5-31
• About Color Profiles ..........................................................................5-32

5-1
Sending Functions

Original Size Selection


Select the size of originals that will serve as the basis for scanning. Be sure to select the original size when using
originals of nonstandard sizes.

Choose the original size from the following groups of original size.

Item Detail Size

Standard Select from automatic Inch models: Auto, Ledger, Legal, Letter, Letter-
Sizes 1 detection and standard R, Statement, Statement-R, 8.5×13.5", Oficio II-
sizes. R, 11×15"
Metric models: Auto, A3, B4, A4, A4-R, B5, B5-
R, A5, A5-R, B6, B6-R, A6-R, Folio
Standard Select from standard Inch models: A3, B4, A4, A4-R, B5, B5-R, A5,
Sizes 2 sizes except Standard A5-R, B6, B6-R, A6-R, Folio, 8K, 16 K, 16K-R
Sizes 1 .
Metric models: Ledger, Legal, Letter, Letter-R,
Statement, Statement-R, 8.5×13.5", Oficio II-R,
11×15", 8K, 16K, 16K-R
Others Select from Hagaki and Hagaki, Oufuku Hagaki, Custom 1 to 4
Custom Original Size *.
Size Entry Enter the size that is not Inch models
indicated in Standard Horizontal: 2 to 17" (in 0.01" increments),
Sizes 1 and 2**. Vertical: 2 to 11.69" (in 0.01" increments)
Metric models
Horizontal: 50 to 432 mm (in 1 mm increments),
Vertical: 50 to 297 mm (in 1 mm increments)
* Regarding the setting method of Custom Original Size (Custom 1 to 4), refer to Custom
Original Size Setup on page 8-4.
** The input units can be changed in the System menu.
Refer to Switching Unit of Measurement on page 8-11.

Use the procedure below to select the original size when sending scanned images.

1 Press the Send key.

2 Place the originals on the platen.

3 Press [Original/Sending Data Format] and then


[Original Size].

5-2
Sending Functions

Ready to send. Destination 4 Press [Standard Sizes 1], [Standard Sizes 2],
Place original.
[Others], or [Size Entry] to select original size.
Original Size

Standard Auto Ledger Letter


Sizes 1
Letter Legal Statement
Place original. Standard
Sizes 2
Statement 11x15" 8.5x13.5"
Others
OficioII

Size Entry
Original : ---
Zoom : 100%
Send : ---

Preview

Add Shortcut Cancel OK

Status 08/08/2009 10:10

Ready to send. Destination When you have selected [Size Entry], press [+] or

Original Size
Place original. [-] to set the sizes of X (horizontal) and Y (vertical).
By pressing [# Keys], you can use the numeric
5
X (2.00 - 17.00)
Standard
Sizes 1 17
"
keys.
Place original. Standard
Sizes 2

Others
# Keys
5 Press [OK].
Y (2.00 - 11.69)
"
Original : ---
Size Entry 11
Zoom : 100%
Send : ---

Preview # Keys

Add Shortcut Cancel OK

Status 08/08/2009 10:10

6 Specify the destination, and press the Start key to


start sending.

Sending Size Selection


Select the sending size (the size of image to be sent).

The table below lists the sizes.

Item Detail Size

Standard Select from Same Inch models: Same as Original Size, Ledger,
Sizes 1 as Original Size or Legal, Letter, Statement, 8.5×13.5", Oficio II,
Standard Size. 11×15"
Metric models: Same as Original Size, A3, B4, A4,
B5, A5, B6, A6, Folio
Standard Select from Inch models: A3, B4, A4, B5, A5, B6, A6, Folio,
Sizes 2 standard size 8K, 16K
except Standard
Metric models: Ledger, Legal, Letter, Statement,
Sizes 1.
8.5×13.5",
Oficio II, 11×15", 8K, 16K
Others Select from Hagaki, Oufuku Hagaki
Hagaki.

5-3
Sending Functions

Relationship between Original Size, Sending Size, and Zoom

Original Size (page 5-2), Sending Size, and Zoom (page 5-5) are related to each other. Refer to the following
table.

Original Size and the size you


the same different
wish to send as are

Original Size Specify as Specify as


necessary necessary
Sending Size Select [Same as Select the
Original] required size
Zoom Select [100%] Select [Auto]
(or [Auto])

NOTE: When you select Sending Size that is different from Original Size, and select the Zoom [100%], you
can send the image as the actual size (No Zoom).

Use the procedure below to select the size for transmission when sending scanned images.

1 Press the Send Key.

2 Place the originals on the platen.

3 Press [Original/Sending Data Format] and then


[Sending Size].

Ready to send. Destination 4 Press [Standard Sizes 1], [Standard Sizes 2], or
Place original. [Others] to select the sending size.
Sending Size

Standard
Sizes 1
Same as
Original Size
Ledger Letter
5 Press [OK].
Legal Statement 11x15"
Place original. Standard
Sizes 2
8.5x13.5" OficioII
Others

Original : ---
Zoom : 100%
Send : ---

Preview

Add Shortcut Cancel OK

Status 08/08/2009 10:10

6 Specify the destination, and press the Start key to


start sending.

5-4
Sending Functions

Zoom
Scans the original by automatically zooming it depending on the sending size.

The table below lists the available options.

Item Detail

100% No Zoom (to be scanned at actual size)

Auto Zoomed automatically according to the specified sending size.

NOTE: When zooming in or out, see Sending Size Selection on page 5-3 when selecting the sending size.
Depending on the combination of original size and sending size, the image is placed at the edge of the paper. 5
To center the image vertically and horizontally on the page, use the centering setting described in Centering on
page 5-6.

Use the procedure below to enlarge or reduce the original to match the transmission size.

1 Press the Send key.

2 Place the originals on the platen.

3 Select the transmission size.

4 Press [Advanced Setup] and then [Zoom].

Ready to send. Destination 5 Press [100%] or [Auto].


Place original.

Zoom 6 Press [OK].


Enlarge or reduce original when scanning.
[100%]: Scan at actual size.
[Auto]: Enlarge or reduce to match
Place original. sending size/storing size.

Original : ---
100% Auto
Zoom : 100%
Send : ---

Preview

Add Shortcut Cancel OK

Status 08/08/2009 10:10

7 Specify the destination, and press the Start key to


start sending.

5-5
Sending Functions

Centering
When you have scanned the original after specifying the original size and sending size, depending on these
sizes, a margin is created at the bottom, left, or right side of paper. By using the centering, the image is placed
with a margin equally created at each of the page Top/Bottom and Left/Right.

Use the procedure below to center then image when sending a scanned image.

1 Press the Send key.

2 Place the originals on the platen.

3 Press [Advanced Setup] and then [Centering].

4 Press [On]. Centering is performed.

5 Press [OK].

6 Specify the destination, and press the Start key to


start sending.

5-6
Sending Functions

Mixed Sized Originals


Using the optional document processor, the originals of different sizes can be placed in a batch and sent. In this
operation, up to 30 originals of different sizes can be placed in the document processor at the same time.

Originals of the Same Width

When the original widths are the same, the combinations of originals that can be placed are as follows.

• Ledger and Letter (A3 and A4)

5
Ledger Letter Letter Ledger

• Legal and Letter-R (Folio and A4-R)

Legal Letter-R Letter-R


Legal

• B4 and B5

5-7
Sending Functions

When the original widths are different

The combinations of originals of different sizes that can be placed together are as follows.

NOTE: When mixing the original sizes as using the following combination: Folio, A4-R, and B5-R, make sure
to set the System Menu key -> Common Settings -> Original / Paper Settings -> Original Auto Detect to [On]
for [Folio]. For more information, refer to Automatic Detection of Originals (Available for metric models only) on
page 8-9.

• A3, B4, A4, B5

• B4, A4-R, B5

• Folio, A4-R, B5-R

5-8
Sending Functions

Use the procedure below to send mixed sized originals as a batch.

1 Press the Send key.

2 Place the original into the document processor.

IMPORTANT: When you place originals of different


width, place the top edge of originals to align with the
width guide at the backside. If the originals are placed
unevenly, they may not be scanned correctly.

3 Press [Original/Sending Data Format] and then


[Mixed Sized Originals].

Ready to send.
Place original.
Destination 4 Select the combination of originals from
[Same Width] and [Different Width].
5
Mixed Size Originals

Scan all sheets in the document processor,


even if differently sized, then send. 5 Press [OK].
*Up to 30 sheets can be placed in
Place original. the document processor for mixed
size originals.

Original : ---
Off Same Width Different
Zoom : 100% Width
Send : ---

Preview

Add Shortcut Cancel OK

Status 08/08/2009 10:10

6 Specify the destination, and press the Start key to


start sending.

5-9
Sending Functions

1-sided/2-sided Selection
Select the type and binding of original depending on the original.

The table below lists the binding directions for each original type.

Original Type Binding

1-sided Sheet Original 1-sided —

2-sided Sheet Original 2-sided* Binding Left/Right,


Binding Top

Open Book Original such Book Binding Left,


as magazine and book Binding Right
* Only when the optional document processor is used.

Use the procedure below to select the original type and binding direction when sending scanned originals.

1 Press the Send key.

2 Place the originals on the platen.

3 Press [Original/Sending Data Format] and then [2-


sided/Book Original].

Ready to send. Destination 4 Press [1-sided], [2-sided], or [Book].


Place original.

2-sided/Book Original 5 When selecting [2-sided], select the binding


1-sided
direction and press [Original Orientation] to select
Place original.
2-sided
Left Right
the direction in which the original is set on the
Book platen.
When selecting [Book], select the binding direction.
Original : ---
Zoom
Send
: 100%
: ---
Top Edge Top

Original
6 Press [OK].
Preview Orientation

Add Shortcut Cancel OK

Status 08/08/2009 10:10

7 Specify the destination, and press the Start key to


start sending.

5-10
Sending Functions

Original Orientation
To send the document in the orientation that can be read properly, specify the upper orientation of original. To
use the functions below, select the orientation in which the original is set on the platen.

• 2-sided/Book Original
• Border Erase
* If [On] is selected as the Orientation Confirmation (page 8-14) setting in the System Menu, the selection
screen for original orientation appears when you select any of the above functions.

When placing the original on the platen

Original [Top Edge Top] [Top Edge Left]

When placing the original on the optional document processor

Original [Top Edge Top] [Top Edge Left]

Use the procedure below to select the orientation when placing the originals on the platen for sending.

1 Press the Send key.

2 Place the originals on the platen.

3 Press [Original/Sending Data Format] and then


[Original Orientation].

5-11
Sending Functions

Ready to send. Destination 4 Select original orientation from [Top Edge Top] and
Place original.
[Top Edge Left].
Original Orientation

Select the orientation of the


original document's top edge.
5 Press [OK].
Place original.

Original : ---
Top Edge Top Top Edge Left
Zoom : 100%
Send : ---

Preview

Add Shortcut Cancel OK

Status 08/08/2009 10:10

6 Specify the destination, and press the Start key to


start sending.

File Format
Select the file format of the image to send.

The table below lists the file formats and their details.

Adjustable range of image


File Format Color mode
quality

PDF 1 Low Quality (High Comp.) to Auto Color (Color/Grayscale), Auto


5 High Quality (Low Comp.) Color (Color/Black and White), Full
Color, Grayscale, Black and White

TIFF 1 Low Quality (High Comp.) to Auto Color (Color/Grayscale), Auto


5 High Quality (Low Comp.) Color (Color/Black and White), Full
Color, Grayscale, Black and White

JPEG 1 Low Quality (High Comp.) to Auto Color (Color/Grayscale), Full


5 High Quality (Low Comp.) Color, Grayscale

XPS 1 Low Quality (High Comp.) to Auto Color (Color/Grayscale), Full


5 High Quality (Low Comp.) Color, Grayscale

High Comp. 1 Compression Ratio Priority Auto Color (Color/Grayscale), Auto


PDF to 3 Quality Priority Color (Color/Black and White), Full
Color, Grayscale

NOTE: In the color mode, when auto color (color/black and white) is selected, [JPEG] and [XPS] cannot be
specified, and when black and white is selected, [JPEG], [High Comp. PDF], and [XPS] cannot be specified.

When [High Comp. PDF] is specified, you cannot adjust the image quality. In addition, when previewing the color
of the image by selecting [High Comp. PDF], it may differ from the actual color.

You can use PDF encryption functions. For details, refer to the following PDF Encryption Functions.

5-12
Sending Functions

Use the procedure below to select the file format for transmission.

1 Press the Send key.

2 Place the originals on the platen.

3 Press [Original/Sending Data Format] and then


[File Format].

4 Select the file format from [PDF], [TIFF], [JPEG],


[XPS], and [High Comp. PDF].

Ready to send. Destination When the color mode in scanning has been
Place original.
selected for Grayscale or Full Color, set the image
File Format
quality.
PDF Image Quality
5
Place original. TIFF
Compression Standard Quality
If you selected [PDF] or [High Comp. PDF], press
Ratio Priority Priority
[Encryption] and specify the encryption settings.
JPEG

Original : --- XPS 5 Press [OK].


Off
Zoom : 100%
Send : ---
High Comp. Encryption
Preview PDF

Add Shortcut Cancel OK

Status 08/08/2009 10:10

6 Specify the destination, and press the Start key to


start sending.

File Separation
Create several files by dividing scanned original data page by page, and send the files.

Use the procedure below to split scanned original data into separate files when sending scanned originals.

1 Press the Send key.

2 Place the originals on the platen.

3 Press [Original/Sending Data Format] and then


[File Separation].

Ready to send. Destination 4 Press [Each Page] to set File Separation.


Place original.

File Separation 5 Press [OK].


Create and send a file for each page
of the original that was read.

Place original.
6 Specify the destination, and press the Start key.
The scanned original is sent after being divided into
files of one page each.
Original : ---
Off Each Page
Zoom : 100%
Send : ---

Preview
NOTE: Three-digit serial number such as
abc_001.pdf, abc_002.pdf... is attached to the end of
Add Shortcut Cancel OK

Status 08/08/2009 10:10


the file name.

5-13
Sending Functions

PDF Encryption Functions


If you have selected PDF or High Comp. PDF for file format, you can restrict the access level for displaying,
printing, and editing PDF's by assigning a secure password.

The items you can restrict the access level with are as follows.

Item Value Detail

Compatibility Acrobat 4.0 or later, Select the version that is compatible with the PDF file.
Acrobat 5.0 or later

Password to Off, On Enter the password to open the PDF file


Open
Document

Password to Off, On Enter the password to edit the PDF file


Edit/Print When you have entered the password to edit/print
Document document, you can specifically limit the operation.

When you send a PDF file, use the procedure below to encrypt the PDF file for transmission.

1 Press the Send key.

2 Place the originals on the platen.

3 Press [Original/Sending Data Format], [File


Format], [PDF] or [High Comp. PDF], and
[Encryption].

File Format - Encryption


4 Press [ ] of Compatibility, select Acrobat 4.0 and
Compatibility Acrobat 4.0 and later later or Acrobat 5.0 and later.
Encryption Level: Middle(40-bit)

Password to Open
Document
Off Password 5 When you enter the password to open the PDF file,
On Confirmation select [On] of Password to Open Document.

6 Press [Password], enter a password (up to 256


Password
to Edit/Print
Off Password
characters) and then press [OK].
Document
On Confirmation

Detail
NOTE: Refer to the Character Entry Method on page
Cancel OK

Status 08/08/2009 10:10


Appendix-10 for details on entering characters.

7 Press [Confirmation] and enter the password again


for confirmation. Then press [OK].

8 When you enter the password to edit the PDF file,


select [On] of Password to Edit/Print Document.

9 In the same way as the entry of Password to Open


Document, enter the password to change the PDF
file.

10 Press [Detail].

5-14
Sending Functions

File Format - Detail


11 Restrict the access level of the PDF file. Press [ ]
of Printing Allowed to select the item (the scope of
Printing Allowed Not Allowed
limit). The item to be displayed differs according to
Changes Allowed Not Allowed the version of Acrobat selected in Compatibility in
step 4.
Copying of Text/Images/Others

Disable

Enable

Cancel OK

Status 08/08/2009 10:10

The table below shows the available settings.


5
Item Detail

Not Allowed Make the printing of PDF file impossible

Allowed (Low Resolution Can print the PDF file only in low resolution
only)*

Allowed Can print the PDF file in original resolution


* Only displayed when [Acrobat 5.0 and later] is selected in Compatibility.

12 Press [ ] of Changes Allowed, and select the


item (the scope of limit). The item to be displayed
differs according to the version of Acrobat selected
in Compatibility in step 4.

The table below shows the available settings.

Item Detail

Not Allowed Cannot change the PDF file

Commenting Can only add commenting

Inserting/Deleting/ Can only insert, delete, and rotate the pages of the
Rotating Pages* PDF file

Page Layout except Can change the page layout except extracting the
extracting Pages** pages of the PDF file

Any except extracting Can conduct all operations except extracting the pages
Pages of the PDF file
* Only displayed when [Acrobat 5.0 and later] is selected in Compatibility.
** Only displayed when [Acrobat 4.0 and later] is selected in Compatibility.

13 From Copying of Text/Images/Others, select


[Disable] or [Enable].

5-15
Sending Functions

The table below shows the available settings.

Item Detail

Disable Prohibit the copying of text and objects on the PDF file.

Enable Can copy text and objects on the PDF file.

14 Press [OK] three times to return to Original/


Sending Data Format.

15 Specify the destination, and press the Start key to


start sending.

Image Quality
Select image quality suitable to the type of original.

The table below shows the quality options.

Item Detail

Text+Photo Text and photos together.

Photo For photos taken with a camera.

Text Only text, no photos.

for OCR For documents to be read by OCR.*

* This function is only available for black and white mode.

Use the procedure below to select the quality when sending scanned originals.

1 Press the Send key.

2 Place the originals on the platen.

3 Press [Color/Image Quality] and then [Original


Image].

Ready to send. Destination 4 Select the original image.


Place original.

Original Image 5 Press [OK].


Select original image
type for best results.
[for OCR]: For documents to be read by OCR.
Place original.

Text+Photo Photo Text

Original : ---
Zoom : 100%
Send : ---
for OCR
Preview

Add Shortcut Cancel OK

Status 08/08/2009 10:10

6 Specify the destination, and press the Start key to


start sending.

5-16
Sending Functions

Adjusting Density
Use the procedure below to adjust the density when scanning the originals.

The table below shows the available settings.

Item Detail

Manual Adjust density using 7 or 13 levels.

Auto Optimum density is selected according to the density of the original.

The procedure for adjusting the density is explained below.

1 Press the Send key.


5
2 Place the originals on the platen.

3 Press [Color/Image Quality] and then [Density].

Ready to send. Destination 4 When selecting manual density adjustment, press


Place original.
[-3] to [+3] (Lighter - Darker) to adjust density.
Density

Auto When selecting auto density adjustment, press


Place original. [Auto].
Lighter Normal Darker

5 Press [OK].
-3 -2 -1 0 +1 +2 +3
Original : ---
Zoom : 100% -2.5 -1.5 -0.5 +0.5 +1.5 +2.5
Send : ---

Preview

Add Shortcut Cancel OK

Status 08/08/2009 10:10

6 Specify the destination, and press the Start key to


start sending.

5-17
Sending Functions

Scan Resolution
Select the fineness of scanning resolution. The finer the scanning becomes (the larger the number becomes),
the better the image quality becomes. However, better resolution also results in larger file size (file capacity) and
longer scanning and sending times. The selectable resolution is 200x100dpi Normal, 200x200dpi Fine,
200x400dpi Super Fine, 300x300dpi, 400x400dpi Ultra Fine, or 600x600dpi.

The procedure for adjusting the scanning resolution when sending a scanned image is explained below.

1 Press the Send key.

2 Place the originals on the platen.

3 Press [Color/Image Quality] and then [Scan


Resolution].

Ready to send. Destination 4 Select the resolution.


Place original. 1
Scan Resolution 5 Press [OK].
Select fineness of scanning resolution.
The larger the number, the better the
image resolution.
Place original.

600x600dpi 400x400dpi 300x300dpi


Ultra Fine
Original : ---
Zoom : 100%
Send : ---
200x400dpi 200x200dpi 200x100dpi
Preview Super Fine Fine Normal

Add Shortcut Cancel OK

Status 08/08/2009 10:10

6 Specify the destination, and press the Start key to


start sending.

5-18
Sending Functions

Sharpness
Select the sharpness of the image outline.

The table below shows the available settings.

Item Detail

Sharpen Emphasize the image outline. Make letters and


lines appear sharper.

Unsharpen Blur the image outline. Can weaken a Moire


effect (grids appearing as wavelike patterns
when scanning printed photos).
5
Use the procedure below to set the sharpness when sending scanned images.

1 Press the Send key.

2 Place the originals on the platen.

3 Press [Color/Image Quality] and then [Sharpness].

Ready to send. Destination 4 Press [-3] to [+3] (Unsharpen - Sharpen) to adjust


Place original.
the sharpness.
Sharpness

5 Press [OK].
Place original.
Unsharpen Sharpen

-3 -2 -1 0 +1 +2 +3
Original : ---
Zoom : 100%
Send : ---

Preview

Add Shortcut Cancel OK

Status 08/08/2009 10:10

6 Specify the destination, and press the Start key to


start sending.

5-19
Sending Functions

Background Density Adjustment


Lightens the background of the colored original when it is too dark.

NOTE: You cannot adjust the background density if you selected [Black & White] in Color / Grayscale / Black
and White Selection (see page 5-21).

Use the procedure below to set the background density when sending scanned images.

1 Press the Send key.

2 Place the originals on the platen.

3 Press [Color/Image Quality] and then [Background


Density Adj.].

Ready to send. Destination 4 Press [On], and press [1] to [5] (Lighter - Darker) to
Place original.
adjust the background density.
Background Density Adj.
Background
Off

Lighter Darker
5 Press [OK].
Place original. On

1 2 3 4 5

Original : ---
Zoom : 100%
Send : ---

Preview

Add Shortcut Cancel OK

Status 08/08/2009 10:10

6 Specify the destination, and press the Start key to


start sending.

5-20
Sending Functions

Color / Grayscale / Black and White Selection


This feature allows you to select the color mode used for scanning when sending images. You can select from
Auto (Color/Gray), Auto (Color/B & W), Full Color, Grayscale or Black & White.

Use the procedure below to select the color mode when sending scanned images.

1 Press the Send key.

2 Place the originals on the platen.

3 Press [Color/Image Quality] and then [Color


Selection].

Ready to send. Destination 4 Select the color mode to be used for scanning. 5
Place original.

Color Selection 5 Press [OK].


Select scanning color.
Select [Auto Color] to automatically send color originals
in full color and black & white originals in black & white.
Place original.

Auto Color Auto Color


(Color/Gray) (Color/B & W)
Original : ---
Zoom : 100%
Send : ---
Full Color Grayscale Black & White
Preview

Add Shortcut Cancel OK

Status 08/08/2009 10:10

6 Specify the destination, and press the Start key to


start sending.

5-21
Sending Functions

Continuous Scan
When the multi-page originals cannot be placed in the document processor at one time, the originals can be
scanned in separate batches and then sent as one job. With this function, originals can be scanned one after
another until you press [Scan Finish].

Any of the following settings can be changed during scanning.

• Original Size selection


• Original Orientation
• 1-sided / 2-sided selection
• Scan density
• Image quality
• Scan resolution
• Color selection
• Sending Size selection
• Zoom
• Border Erase

The procedure for using continuous scanning when sending scanned images is explained below.

1 Press the Send key.

2 Press [Advanced Setup] and then [Continuous


Scan].

Ready to send. Destination 3 Press [On]. Continuous Scan is selected.


Place original.

Continuous Scan 4 Press [OK].


Scan a large number of originals
in separate batches and then produce
as one job.
Place original. *Settings can be changed during scanning.

Original : ---
Off On
Zoom : 100%
Send : ---

Preview

Add Shortcut Cancel OK

Status 08/08/2009 10:10

5 Specify the destination.

6 Place the original, and press the Start key.

When the scanning is completed, change the


settings as necessary.

7 Place the next original, and press the Start key.


Scan the remaining originals by the same
procedure.

When you have scanned all the originals, press


[Finish Scan] to start sending.

5-22
Sending Functions

Border Erase
Use Border Erase to remove black shadows that appear around the outside of the original when scanning and
sending originals. The following options can be selected.

Border Erase Sheet


Erases black borders around the single sheet original.

Original Copy
5
Border Erase Book
Erases black borders around the edges and in the
middle of the original such as a thick book. You can
specify the widths individually to erase the borders
around the edges and in the center of the book.

Original Copy

Individual Border Erase


Specify border erase widths individually for all edges.

Original Copy

In each option, the available ranges are as below.

Input units Border Erase Range

Inch models 0 to 2" (in 0.01" increments)

Metric models 0 mm to 50 mm (in 1-mm increments)

5-23
Sending Functions

Border Erase to Back Page


When scanning a 2-sided original, this allows you to erase the borders on the back of the original. The table
below shows the available settings.

Item Detail

Same as Front Border Erase performed using the same setting as the
Page front page

Do Not Erase No Border Erase performed on the back page

Use the procedure below to erase borders when sending scanned originals.

1 Press the Send key.

2 Place the originals on the platen.

3 Press [Advanced Setup] and then [Border Erase].

Ready to send. Destination 4 Press [Border Erase Sheet] to erase borders for an
Place original. individual sheet or [Border Erase Book] to erase
Border Erase
Border (0.00 - 2.00)
borders for a book.
Off
"
0.25

Place original. Border Erase Use [+] or [-] to enter the width in Border or Gutter.
Sheet
# Keys
Same as Press [# Keys] to use the number keys for entry.
Border Erase Front Page
Book Back Page
Gutter (0.00 - 2.00)

Original : --- Individual 0.25 " Press [Individual Border Erase] to select the
Border Erase
Zoom
Send
: 100%
: ---
individual border erase.
Preview # Keys

Use [+] or [-] to enter the border width or press [#


Add Shortcut Cancel OK

Status 08/08/2009 10:10


Keys] and enter the width using the numeric keys.

Ready to send. Destination Press [Original Orientation] to select the original


Place original. orientation from either [Top Edge Top] or [Top Edge
Border Erase
(0.00 - 2.00)
Left], and press [OK].
Off
Top "
0.25
Place original. Border Erase "
For 2-sided originals, press [Back Page] and then
Sheet Bottom 0.25
Same as press [Same as Front Page] or [Do Not Erase].
Border Erase " Front Page
Left 0.25
Book Back Page

Original : --- Individual


Border Erase
Right 0.25
"
5 Press [OK].
Top Edge Top
Zoom : 100%
Send : ---
Original
Preview # Keys Orientation

Add Shortcut Cancel OK

Status 08/08/2009 10:10

6 Specify the destination, and press the Start key to


start sending.

5-24
Sending Functions

Enter Document Name/File Name


This setting allows you to assign a document name to scanned images. You can specify a default for the
document name.

Use the procedure below to assign names to scanned documents that you are sending.

1 Press the Send key.

2 Place the originals on the platen.

3 Press [Advanced Setup] and then [File Name


Entry].

Ready to send. Destination 4 Press [File Name]. 5


Place original.

File Name Entry

Add a file name.


Additional information such as Job No.
and Date and Time can also be set.

File Name doc

Additional Info & [ Date and Time ]

Job No. Date and Time

Add Shortcut Cancel OK

Status 08/08/2009 10:10

5 Enter the document name, and press [OK].

NOTE: Up to 32 characters can be entered for the


document name.

6 Press [Job No.] to enter the job No., and [Date and
Time] to enter the date and time.

7 Press [OK].

8 Specify the destination, and press the Start key to


start sending.

5-25
Sending Functions

Enter E-mail Subject and Body


When sending E-mail, enter the subject and body of the
E-mail.

Use the procedure below to enter the subject and body


for an E-mail message and then send the E-mail.

1 Press the Send key.

2 Press [Advanced Setup] and then [E-mail Subject/


Body].

Ready to send. Destination 3 Press [Subject].


Place original. 1
E-mail Subject/Body

Subject

Place original. Body

Original : ---
Zoom : 100%
Send : ---

Preview

Add Shortcut Cancel OK

Status 08/08/2009 10:10

4 Enter the subject, and press [OK].

NOTE: Up to 60 characters can be entered for the


subject.

5 Press [Body].

6 Enter the body and press [OK].

NOTE: Up to 500 characters can be entered for the


body.

7 Press [OK].

8 Specify the destination, and press the Start key to


start sending.

5-26
Sending Functions

WSD Scan
WSD Scan saves images of originals scanned on this machine as files on a WSD-compatible computer.

NOTE: To use WSD Scan, confirm that the computer used for WSD scanning and the machine is network-
connected, and WSD Scan Setup (page 8-68) is set to On in the network settings. For information on operating
the computer, refer to the computer’s help or the operation guide of your software.

Installing Driver Software (for Windows Vista)


1 Click Start and then Network in the computer.

2 Right-click the machine’s icon and then click


Install. 5
NOTE: If the User Account Control window appears,
click Continue.
If the Found New Hardware window appears, click
Cancel.

3 During the installation, double-click the icon shown


on the task bar to display the Driver Software
Installation screen. When Your devices are
ready to use is displayed on the Driver Software
Installation screen, the installation is completed.

Procedure Using this machine


1 Press the Send Key.

Displays the screen for sending.

NOTE: Depending on the settings, the address book


screen may appear. In this event, press [Cancel] to
display the screen for sending.

2 Place the originals in the document processor or on


the platen.

3 Press [WSD Scan].

4 Press [From Operation Panel] and press [Next].

5-27
Sending Functions

WSD Scan - Selecting Computer


5 Select the destination computer and press [OK].
Select the destination computer and press [OK].

Press [Reload] to reload the computer list.


Computer Name Reload
pc00010 You can view information on the selected computer
pc000102 by pressing [Detail].
pc000103 1/1
Detail
pc000104

pc000105

Cancel Back OK

Status 08/08/2009 10:10

6 Select the type of originals, file format, etc., as


necessary.

7 Press the Start key. Sending begins and the


software installed on the computer is activated.

Procedure Using WSD Scan from Your Computer


1 Press the Send Key.

The send screen appears.

NOTE: Depending on the settings, the address book


screen may appear. In this event, press [Cancel] to
display the screen for sending.

2 Place the originals in the document processor or on


the platen.

3 Press [WSD Scan].

4 Press [From Computer] and press [Execute].

5 Use the software installed on the computer to send


the images.

5-28
Sending Functions

Job Finish Notice


Sends a notice by e-mail when a job is completed.

Use the procedure below to specify the Job Finish Notice settings.

1 Press the Send key.

2 Place the originals on the platen.

3 Press [Advanced Setup] and then [Job Finish


Notice].

Ready to send. Destination 4 To select the destination from the address book,
Place original.

Job Finish Notice


press [Address Book] on the left of the screen and
then press [Address Book] in the next screen.
5
Off

Address Book Destination Detail Select the destination to be notified, then press
[OK].
Address
Entry

You can view information on the notification


Detail Address Book
destination by pressing [Detail].

Add Shortcut Cancel OK

Status 08/08/2009 10:10

5 Specify the destination to send the finish notice,


and press [OK].

NOTE: For the procedure to select the destination


from the Address Book, refer Specifying Destination on
page 3-28.

Ready to send. Destination 6 To directly enter the address, press [Address Entry]
Place original.
and then [E-mail Address].
Job Finish Notice

Off

E-mail
Address Book Address

Address
Entry

Add Shortcut Cancel OK

Status 08/08/2009 10:10

7 Enter the E-mail address, and press [OK].

8 Press [OK].

9 Specify the destination, and press the Start key to


start sending.

When the sending is completed, the finish notice is


sent to the specified E-mail address.

5-29
Sending Functions

Send and Print


When you send originals, this feature allows you to print a copy of the document being sent.

The procedure for using Send and Print is explained below.

1 Press the Send key.

2 Place the originals on the platen.

3 Press [Advanced Setup] and then [Send and Print].

4 Press [On].

5 Press [OK].

6 Specify the destination and press the Start key.


Transmission begins and a copy of the transmitted
document is printed.

Send and Store


When you send originals, this feature allows you to store a copy of the document being sent in a Custom Box.

The procedure for using Send and Store is explained below.

1 Press the Send key.

2 Place the originals on the platen.

3 Press [Advanced Setup], [ ], and then [Send and


Store].

Ready to send. Destination 4 Press [On].


Place original.

Send and Store 5 Select the Custom Box in which the copy is to be
Off Custom Box
stored.
No. Name Used Area
On
0006 06 BOX001 6%
If a password entry screen for the Custom Box
0007 07 BOX002 4%
appears, enter the password.
0008 08 BOX003 8% 2/2

0009 09 BOX004 4%
You can view information on the selected Custom
0010 10 BOX005 2% Detail
Box by pressing [Detail].
Add Shortcut Cancel OK

Status 08/08/2009 10:10


6 Press [OK].

7 Specify the destination and press the Start key.


Transmission begins and a copy of the transmitted
document is stored in the specified Custom Box.

5-30
Sending Functions

FTP Encrypted TX
This allows you to encrypt documents when you send them. If you select [On] in this option, you can then select
the encryption method in the basic send screen.

Use the procedure below to scan and send originals as encrypted files.

1 Press the Send Key.

2 Place the originals in the document processor or on


the platen.

3 Press [Advanced Setup], [ ], and then [FTP


Encrypted TX].

4 Press [On].
5
5 Press [OK].

NOTE: Click Advanced -> Secure Protocols in the


COMMAND CENTER. Be sure that SSL of Secure
Protocol Settings is On and one or more effective
encryption are selected in Clientside Settings. For
details, refer to the KYOCERA COMMAND CENTER
Operation Guide.

Color Type
This sets the color type when you send color documents. The table below shows the available settings.

Item Detail

RGB –

sRGB Match the color reproduction space between sRGB compatible systems.

Selecting RGB displays the color profile values set on the machine.

1 Press System Menu key.

2 Press [Send] and [Change] of Color Type.

Send - Color Type


3 Select [RGB] or [sRGB].
Specify the color type to send color images.

4 Press [OK].
RGB
Profile:

RGB FINE 1
sRGB

Cancel OK

Status 08/08/2009 10:10

5-31
Sending Functions

About Color Profiles


The color scanner provides color profiles to adjust color.

NOTE: The color profile data import method varies for every TWAIN/WIA-compliant software. Use the color
profile after carefully reading the manual included with your TWAIN/WIA-complaint software.

Selecting a color profile compatible with this device


1 Select the color profile found in the CD included
with this scanner CD (Product Library) under the
Color Profile folder.

NOTE: Use the indicated color profiles when you


chose RGB in color type.

5-32
6 Document Box

This chapter explains the typical procedure for utilizing Document Box.

• Using a Custom Box ...........................................................................6-2


• Using a Job Box................................................................................6-12
• Printing Documents Stored in Removable USB Memory..................6-20
• Saving Documents to USB Memory (Scan to USB) .........................6-22

6-1
Document Box

Using a Custom Box

NOTE: In the following explanation, it is assumed that user login administration is enabled. For details on User
Logon privileges, refer to User Privileges on page 3-38.

Creating a New Custom Box


Use the procedure below to create a new box in the user box.

1 Press the Document Box key.

Custom Box. 2 Press [Custom Box] and then [Register/Edit Box].

No. Name Owner Used Area

0001 SALES Anonymous ---- Search(Name)

Search(No.)

1/1 Register/Edit
Box

Store File Detail Open

Custom Box Job Box Removable Memory FAX Box

Status 08/08/2009 10:10

3 Press [Add].

4 Press [Change] for each item, enter the information


and then press [OK].

The table below lists the items to be set.

Item Detail

Box No Enter the box number by pressing [-, +] or number keys.


The box number can be from 0001 to 1000. A Custom Box should
have a unique number.
If you enter 0000, the smallest number available will be
automatically assigned.

Box Name Enter a box name consisting of up to 32 characters.


Refer to the Character Entry Method on Appendix-10 for details on
entering characters.

Box Password User access to the box can be restricted by specifying a password
to protect the box. Entering a password is not mandatory.
Enter the same password of up to 16 characters in both [Password]
and [Confirm Password].

6-2
Document Box

Item Detail

Usage Restriction To preserve the hard disk capacity, the storage capacity for a box
can be restricted.
To enable a capacity restriction enter a value for the storage
capacity of the Custom Box in megabytes by pressing [-, +] or
number keys.
You can enter a limit between 1 and 30,000. (Changes according to
the number of created custom boxes.)

Auto File Deletion Automatically deletes stored documents after a set period of time.
Press [On] to enable automatic deletion and then use [+] and [-] or
the numeric keys to enter the number of days for which documents
are stored.
You can enter any number between 1 and 31 day(s). To disable
automatic file deletion, press [Off].

Overwrite Setting Specifies whether or not old stored documents are overwritten when 6
new documents are stored.
To overwrite old documents, press [Permit].
To retain old documents, press [Prohibit].

Delete after Printed Automatically delete document from the box once printing is
complete. To delete the document, press [On]. To retain the
document, press [Off].

NOTE: If user login administration is enabled, "Owner"


and "Permission" are also displayed. Refer to Creating
new Custom Boxes when user login administration is
enabled on page 3-39.

5 Check the details you have entered and then press


[Register]. The Custom Box is created.

Setting the document deletion time

Sets the time when documents stored in a custom box are deleted.

The procedure for using Auto File Deletion Time is explained below.

1 Press the System Menu key.

2 Press [Document Box/Removable Memory], [Next]


of Custom Box, [Next] of Default Setting and then
[Change] of Auto File Deletion Time.

6-3
Document Box

Document Box/Removable Memory - Auto File Deletion Time


3 Set the time at which the document is deleted by
Set the time to automatically delete stored documents. pressing [+], [-]. Press [# Keys] to enter the time
directly using the numeric keys.

Hour Minute

21 30

# Keys # Keys

Cancel OK

Status 08/08/2009 10:10

4 Press [OK]. The time for document deletion is set.

Storing Documents
The procedure for storing documents in a custom box is explained below.

1 Press the Document Box key.

2 Place the originals in the document processor or on


the platen.

Custom Box. 3 Press [Custom Box], select the box where the
document will be stored and then press [Store File].
No. Name Owner Used Area

0001 SALES Anonymous ---- Search(Name)

Search(No.) NOTE: The Custom Box to store a file needs to be


1/1 Register/Edit
created in advance.
Box
If a custom box is protected by a password, enter the
correct password.

Store File Detail Open

Custom Box Job Box Removable Memory FAX Box

Status 08/08/2009 10:10

4 Select the type of originals, scanning density, etc.,


as necessary.

5 Press the Start key. The original is scanned and the


data is stored in the specified Custom Box.

NOTE: Enter up to 64 characters as the file name.

6-4
Document Box

Printing Documents
The procedure for printing documents in a custom box is explained below.

1 Press the Document Box key.

2 Press [Custom Box], select the box containing the


document you want to print and press [Open].

NOTE: If a custom box is protected by a password,


enter the correct password.

Box:
3 Select the document you wish to print by checking
the checkbox.
File Name Date and Time Size

0001 0404200710574501 10/10/2008 09:40 21 MB Search(Name) The document is marked with a checkmark.
0002

0003
0404200710574511

0404200710574521
10/10/2008 09:50

10/10/2008 10:00
21 MB

21 MB
6
1/1
NOTE: To deselect, press the checkbox again and
Detail
remove the checkmark.
Preview

Print Send Join Move/Copy Delete Store File


4 Press [Print].
Close

Status 08/08/2009 10:10

5 Set the paper selection, duplex printing, etc., as


desired.

6 Press the Start key. Printing of the selected


document begins.

6-5
Document Box

Sending Documents
The procedure for sending documents in a custom box is explained below.

1 Press the Document Box key.

2 Press [Custom Box], select the box containing the


document you want to send and press [Open].

NOTE: If a custom box is protected by a password,


enter the correct password.

Box:
3 Select the document you wish to send by checking
the checkbox.
File Name Date and Time Size

0001 0404200710574501 10/10/2008 09:40 21 MB Search(Name) The document is marked with a checkmark.
0002 0404200710574511 10/10/2008 09:50 21 MB

0003 0404200710574521 10/10/2008 10:00 21 MB


1/1
NOTE: You cannot select and send multiple documents.
Detail
To deselect, press the checkbox again and remove the
Preview checkmark.
Print Send Join Move/Copy Delete Store File

Close 4 Press [Send].


Status 08/08/2009 10:10

The screen for sending appears.

NOTE: Depending on the settings, the address book


screen may appear.

5 Set the destination.

NOTE: For more information on selecting destinations,


refer to Specifying Destination on page 3-28.

6 Press the Start key. Sending of the selected


document begins.

6-6
Document Box

Form Overlay from Custom Boxes


This function allows you to retrieve images (image files), overlay them into documents stored in custom boxes
and then print the results.

Use the procedure below.

1 Press the Document Box key.

2 Press [Custom Box], select the box containing the


document you want to overlay the image into and
print, and then press [Open].

NOTE: If a custom box is protected by a password,


enter the correct password.

Box:
3 Select the document you wish to print by checking 6
the checkbox.
File Name Date and Time Size

0001 0404200710574501 10/10/2008 09:40 21 MB Search(Name) The document is marked with a checkmark.
0002 0404200710574511 10/10/2008 09:50 21 MB

0003 0404200710574521 10/10/2008 10:00 21 MB


1/1
NOTE: To deselect, press the checkbox again and
Detail
remove the checkmark.
Preview

Print Send Join Move/Copy Delete Store File


4 Press [Print].
Close

Status 08/08/2009 10:10

Ready to store in Box. Copies 5 Press [Functions], [Form Overlay], [Select Stored
File Name: Form], and then [Select Form].
Form Overlay
Density (10 - 100)
Off
100 %

Place original. Select


NOTE: You can change the form density setting
Stored Form
through 10 levels from 10% to 100%. Press the [+] or
[-] buttons in Density.
Original : ---
Off
Zoom : 100%
Paper : ---
Select
Preview Form

Add Shortcut Cancel OK

Status 08/08/2009 10:10

6 In Form Overlay - Select Form, select the image file


to be overlaid onto the document from the
displayed document boxes.

You can only select one image file.

7 Press [OK].

8 Press [OK] again to return to the Functions screen.

9 Press the Start key. Printing begins.

6-7
Document Box

Editing Documents
This function allows you to move or copy documents stored in custom boxes into other boxes or to join multiple
documents together. You can also copy documents to USB memory connected to this machine.

Moving a Document / Copying a Document

The procedure for moving or copying documents is explained below.

1 Press the Document Box key.

2 Press [Custom Box], select the box containing the


document you want to move or copy and press
[Open].

NOTE: If a custom box is protected by a password,


enter the correct password.

Box:
3 Select the document in the list that you want to
move or copy by pressing the checkbox.
File Name Date and Time Size

0001 0404200710574501 10/10/2008 09:40 21 MB Search(Name) The document is marked with a checkmark.
0002 0404200710574511 10/10/2008 09:50 21 MB

0003 0404200710574521 10/10/2008 10:00 21 MB


1/1
NOTE: To deselect, press the checkbox again and
Detail
remove the checkmark.
Preview

Print Send Join Move/Copy Delete Store File


4 Press [Move/Copy].
Close

Status 08/08/2009 10:10

Custom Box. 5 To move the document, press [Move to Custom


Box].
Move/Copy

Select the required operation and press [Next]. To copy the document, press [Copy to Custom Box]
or [Copy to Removable Mem.].

6 Press [Next].
Copy to Move to Copy to
Custom Box Custom Box Removable Mem.

Cancel Back Next

Status 08/08/2009 10:10

6-8
Document Box

Job Box. 7 To copy or move the document to a custom box,


select the destination box.
Move to Custom Box

Select the destination box and press [Move]. To copy the document to USB memory, select the
Document destination folder and press [Next]. If necessary,
No. Name Owner Used Area
set the saved file size and the file format, etc.
Up
0001 Document1 Administrator 2 MB

0002 Document2 Administrator 3 MB 8 Press [Move] or [Copy] and then press [Yes] in the
0003 Document3 Administrator 3 MB confirmation screen. The selected document is
Open
0004 Document4 Administrator 5 MB moved or copied.
Cancel Back Move

Status 08/08/2009 10:10

NOTE: If the box to which the document is to be


moved or copied is protected by a password, enter the
correct password.

Joining Documents
6
The procedure for joining documents in a custom box is explained below.

NOTE: You can only join a document to other documents in the same custom box. If necessary, move the
documents to be joined beforehand.

1 Press the Document Box key.

2 Press [Custom Box], select the box containing the


documents you want to join and press [Open].

NOTE: If a custom box is protected by a password,


enter the correct password.

Box:
3 Select the documents in the list that you wish to join
by pressing the checkbox.
File Name Date and Time Size

0001 0404200710574501 10/10/2008 09:40 21 MB Search(Name) The document is marked with a checkmark.
0002 0404200710574511 10/10/2008 09:50 21 MB

0003 0404200710574521 10/10/2008 10:00 21 MB You can join up to 10 documents.


1/1

Detail

Preview NOTE: To deselect, press the checkbox again and


Print Send Join Move/Copy Delete Store File
remove the checkmark.
Close

Status 08/08/2009 10:10 4 Press [Join].

6-9
Document Box

Join
5 Arrange the documents into the order in which they
Confirm the order of documents to combine.
are to be joined.

File Name Date and Time Size Highlight the document you want to rearrange and
2008101010574501 10/10/2008 09:40 21 MB press [Up] or [Down] to move it to the correct place
2008101010574511 10/10/2008 09:50 21 MB
in the sequence.
2008101010574521 10/10/2008 10:10 21 MB 1/1
Up
6 Press [Next].
Down

Cancel Next

Status 08/08/2009 10:10

7 Press [File Name], enter the file name for the joined
document and press [OK].

NOTE: Enter up to 32 characters as the file name.

8 Press [Join] and then press [Yes] in the


confirmation screen. The documents are joined.

NOTE: After joining, the original documents are left


unchanged. Delete the documents if they are no longer
needed.

6-10
Document Box

Deleting Documents
The procedure for deleting documents in a custom box is explained below.

1 Press the Document Box key.

2 Press [Custom Box], select the box containing the


document you want to delete and press [Open].

NOTE: If a custom box is protected by a password,


enter the correct password.

Box:
3 Select the document you wish to delete by
checking the checkbox.
File Name Date and Time Size

0001 0404200710574501 10/10/2008 09:40 21 MB Search(Name) The document is marked with a checkmark.
0002

0003
0404200710574511

0404200710574521
10/10/2008 09:50

10/10/2008 10:00
21 MB

21 MB
6
1/1
NOTE: [Delete] is disabled until a document is
Detail
selected.
Preview To deselect, press the checkbox again and remove the
Print Send Join Move/Copy Delete Store File checkmark.
Close

Status 08/08/2009 10:10


4 Press [Delete]. The delete confirmation screen
appears.

5 Press [Yes]. The document is deleted.

6-11
Document Box

Using a Job Box

Private Print/Stored Job Box


Private Print/Stored Job Box stores the print data which is printed by using the printer driver as a Private Print/
Stored Job.

Refer to the Printer Driver User Guide on how to print a job as Private Print or Stored Job using the printer driver.

Printing a Document in Private Print/Stored Job Box

You can print documents stored in a Private Print/Stored Job box.

Use the procedure below to print a document.

1 Press the Document Box key.

2 Press [Job Box].

3 Select [Private Print/Stored Job] and press [Open].

Job Box. 4 Select the creator of the document to print and


press [Open].
Private Print/Stored Job

User Name Files

1 User 5

2 User 2

3 User 1 1/2

4 User 1

5 User 1

Open

Close

Status 08/08/2009 10:10

Job Box. 5 Select the document and press [Print].

User:

File Name Date and Time Size NOTE: If a password is set for the Custom Box in
1File 10/10/2008 09:40 21 MB advance, enter the correct password.
2File 10/10/2008 09:45 30 MB

3File 10/10/2008 09:50 36 MB 1/1

Detail
4File 10/10/2008 09:55 21 MB

5File 10/10/2008 10:00 30 MB

Print Delete

Close

Status 08/08/2009 10:10

6 If the document is protected by a password, enter


the password using the numeric keys.

7 Specify the number of copies to print as desired.

8 Press [Start Print] to start printing.

Upon completion of printing, the Private Print job is


automatically deleted.

6-12
Document Box

Deleting a Document

You can delete documents stored in a Private Print/Stored Job box.

Use the procedure below to delete a document.

1 Press the Document Box key.

2 Press [Job Box].

3 Select [Private Print/Stored Job] and press [Open].

Job Box. 4 Select the creator of the document and press


[Open].
Private Print/Stored Job

User Name Files

1 User 5

2 User 2

3 User

4 User
1

1
1/2
6
5 User 1

Open

Close

Status 08/08/2009 10:10

Job Box. 5 To delete the document, select the document and


press [Delete].
User:

File Name Date and Time Size


When the delete confirmation screen appears,
1File 10/10/2008 09:40 21 MB
press [Yes].
2File 10/10/2008 09:45 30 MB

3File 10/10/2008 09:50 36 MB 1/1


If the document is protected by a password, enter
Detail
4File 10/10/2008 09:55 21 MB
the password using the numeric keys and the
5File 10/10/2008 10:00 30 MB
document is deleted.
Print Delete

Close

Status 08/08/2009 10:10

Quick Copy/Proof and Hold Print Box


Quick Copy/Proof and Hold box stores the print data which is printed by using the printer driver as a Quick Copy
or Proof and Hold Print job.

Refer to the Printer Driver User Guide on how to print a job as Quick Copy or Proof and Hold Print job using the
printer driver.

Setting the Number of Stored Jobs

To maintain free space on the hard disk, you can set the maximum number of stored jobs.

Use the procedure below to set the number of stored jobs.

1 Press the System Menu key.

2 Press [Document Box/Removable Memory], [Next]


of Job Box, then [Change] of Quick Copy Job
Retention.

6-13
Document Box

Document Box/Removable Memory - Quick Copy Job Retention 3 Press [+] or [–] to enter the maximum number of
Set the maximum number of quick copy/proof print jobs to retain. stored jobs. You can enter any number between 0
Use [-]/[+] or the numeric keys to enter a number.
*Set this number to 0 to not retain any jobs. and 50.

You can also enter the number using the numeric


(0 - 50)
keys.
32 job(s)

NOTE: If you enter a value of 0 (zero), you cannot use


the Repeat Copy function.
Cancel OK

Status 08/08/2009 10:10


4 Press [OK]. The maximum number of stored jobs is
set.

Printing a Document

You can print documents stored in the Quick Copy/Proof and Hold box.

Use the procedure below to print a document.

1 Press the Document Box key.

2 Press [Job Box].

3 Select [Quick Copy/Proof and Hold] and press


[Open].

Job Box. 4 Select the creator of the document and press


[Open].
Quick Copy/Proof and Hold

User Name Files

1 User 5

2 User 2

3 User 1 1/2

4 User 1

5 User 1

Open

Close

Status 08/08/2009 10:10

Job Box. 5 Select the document to print, and press [Print].

User:

File Name Date and Time Size

1File 10/10/2008 09:40 21 MB

2File 10/10/2008 09:45 30 MB

3File 10/10/2008 09:50 36 MB 1/1

Detail
4File 10/10/2008 09:55 21 MB

5File 10/10/2008 10:00 30 MB

Print Delete

Close

Status 08/08/2009 10:10

6 Specify the number of prints as desired.

7 Press [Start Print] to start printing.

6-14
Document Box

Deleting a Document

You can delete documents stored in the Quick Copy/Proof and Hold box.

Use the procedure below to delete a document.

1 Press the Document Box key.

2 Press [Job Box], [Quick Copy/Proof and Hold], then


[Open].

Job Box. 3 Select the creator of the document and press


[Open].
Quick Copy/Proof and Hold

User Name Files

1 User 5

2 User 2

3 User 1 1/2

4 User

5 User
1

1
6
Open

Close

Status 08/08/2009 10:10

Job Box. 4 Select the document to delete and press [Delete].

User: The delete confirmation screen appears.


File Name Date and Time Size

1File 10/10/2008 09:40 21 MB

2File 10/10/2008 09:45 30 MB

3File 10/10/2008 09:50 36 MB 1/1

Detail
4File 10/10/2008 09:55 21 MB

5File 10/10/2008 10:00 30 MB

Print Delete

Close

Status 08/08/2009 10:10

5 Press [Yes]. The document is deleted.

Repeat Copy Box

Setting the Number of Stored Jobs

To maintain free space on the hard disk, you can set the maximum number of stored jobs.

Use the procedure below to specify the maximum number of stored jobs.

1 Press the System Menu key.

2 Press [Document Box/Removable Memory], [Next]


of Job Box, [Change] of Repeat Copy Job
Retention.

6-15
Document Box

Document Box/Removable Memory - Repeat Copy Job Retention


3 Use the [+] and [–] keys or the numeric keys to
Set the maximum number of repeat copy jobs to retain. enter the maximum number of stored jobs.
Use [-]/[+] or the numeric keys to enter a number.
*Set this number to 0 to not retain any jobs.

You can enter any number between 0 and 50.

(0 - 50)

32 job(s)
NOTE: If you enter a value of 0 (zero), no jobs are
stored.

4 Press [OK]. The maximum number of stored jobs is


Cancel OK
set.
Status 08/08/2009 10:10

Printing a Document

You can print the documents stored in the Repeat Copy box.

Use the procedure below to print a document.

1 Press the Document Box key.

2 Press [Job Box].

3 Select [Repeat Copy] box, and press [Open].

Job Box.
4 Select the document to print and press [Print].

Repeat Copy

Name Date and Time Size

1010200800101002 10/10/2008 10:00 21 MB

1/1

Detail

Print Delete

Close

Status 08/08/2009 10:10

5 If the document is protected by a password, enter


the password using the numeric keys.

6 Press [Start Print] to start printing.

The Repeat Copy box job will be deleted when the


main power switch is turned off.

6-16
Document Box

Automatic Delete Setting for Temporary Documents

This setting specifies that documents, such as Private Printing, Quick Copying, or Proof and Hold Printing, saved
temporarily in the job box are automatically deleted after they have been saved for a set time.

The table below shows the available settings.

Item Detail

Off Temporary documents are not automatically


deleted. However, the temporary documents will
be deleted when the power is turned off.

1 hour Documents are deleted after 1 hour.

4 hours Documents are deleted after 4 hours.

1 day Documents are deleted after 1 day.


6
1 week Documents are deleted after 1 week.

Use the procedure below to set automatic deletion for temporary documents.

1 Press the System Menu key.

2 Press [Document Box/Removable Memory], [Next] of Job Box, then [Change] of Deletion of Job Retention.

3 Select the time for automatic deletion.

To deactivate automatic deletion, press [Off].

4 Press [OK].

NOTE: This function is valid for documents saved after the function is set. Regardless of this function setting,
temporary documents are deleted when the main power switch is turned off.

Form for Form Overlay Box

Storing a Form

You can store forms to be used for the form overlay in the Form for Form Overlay box. You can store a 1-page
form.

Use the procedure below to store a form.

1 Press the Document Box key.

2 Place the original in the document processor or on


the platen.

3 Press [Job Box].

6-17
Document Box

Job Box. 4 Select [Form for Form Overlay] and press [Open].
Name Files

Private Print/Stored Job 21

Quick Copy/Proof and Hold 21

Repeat Copy 21

Form for Form Overlay 21

Open

Custom Box Job Box Removable Memory FAX Box

Status 08/08/2009 10:10

Form for Form Overlay


5 Press [Store File].

Name Date and Time Size

1010200809530900 10/10/2008 09:00 21 MB

1010200800530910 10/10/2008 09:10 30 MB

1010200800530920 10/10/2008 09:20 30 MB


1/1

Detail

Print Delete Store File

Close

Status 08/08/2009 10:10

6 If necessary, select the image quality of original,


scanning density, etc. before the original is
scanned.

7 Press the Start key. The original is scanned and


stored in the Form for Form Overlay box.

NOTE: For information on using image overlays with a


stored form, see Form Overlay on page 4-22 and Form
Overlay from Custom Boxes on page 6-7.

Deleting a Form Stored

You can delete the form stored in the Form for Form Overlay box.

Use the procedure below to delete a form.

1 Press the Document Box key.

2 Press [Job Box].

3 Select [Form for Form Overlay] and press [Open].

6-18
Document Box

Form for Form Overlay


4 Select the form to delete and press [Delete].

Name Date and Time Size The delete confirmation screen appears.
1010200809530900 10/10/2008 09:00 21 MB

1010200800530910 10/10/2008 09:10 30 MB

1010200800530920 10/10/2008 09:20 30 MB


1/1

Detail

Print Delete Store File

Close

Status 08/08/2009 10:10

5 Press [Yes]. The form is deleted.

6-19
Document Box

Printing Documents Stored in Removable USB Memory


Plugging USB memory directly into the machine enables you to quickly and easily print the files stored in the
USB memory without having to use a computer.

Limitations
• The following file types can be printed:
•PDF file (Version 1.5)
•TIFF file (TIFF V6/TTN2 format)
•JPEG file
•XPS file
•Encrypted PDF file
• PDF files you wish to print should have an extension (.pdf).
• Files to be printed should be saved no further down than the top 3 folder levels.
• Use USB memory properly formatted by this machine.
• Plug the USB memory directly into the USB memory slot (A1). We do not guarantee that USB memory
printing is error free if a USB hub is used.

Printing
Print documents stored in the removable USB memory.

1 Plug the USB memory into the USB memory slot


(A1).

IMPORTANT: Use USB memory formatted by this


machine. If a USB memory formatted by any other
device is used, The removable memory is not
formatted. may appear. To format a USB memory,
press [Format] and follow the instructions on the screen.

2 When the machine reads the USB memory,


Removable Memory is recognized. Displaying files.
may appear. Press [Yes] to display the removable
memory screen.

NOTE: If the message does not appear, press the


Document Box key and then [Removable Memory].

3 Select the folder containing the file to be printed


and press [Open].

The machine will display documents in the top 3


folder levels, including the root folder.

NOTE: To return to a higher level folder, press [Up].

6-20
Document Box

Removable Memory. 4 Select the file to be printed and press [Print].

Removable Memory

Name Date and Time Size


Up
1 Document 10/10/2008 09:30 1 MB

2 Document 10/10/2008 09:40 3 MB

3 Document 10/10/2008 09:50 4 MB 001/999

Memory
4 Document 10/10/2008 10:00 1 MB Information

5 Document 10/10/2008 10:05 2 MB Remove


Memory

Print Delete Detail Open Store File

Custom Box Job Box Removable Memory FAX Box

Status 08/08/2009 10:10

5 Change the number of copies, duplex printing, etc.


as desired.

6 Press the Start key. Printing of the selected file


begins.
6
Removing USB Memory
Remove the USB memory.

IMPORTANT: Be sure to follow the proper procedure to avoid damaging the data or USB memory.

1 Press the Document Box key.

2 Press [Removable Memory].

Removable Memory. 3 Press [Remove Memory].

Removable Memory

Name Date and Time Size


Up
1 Document 10/10/2008 09:30 1 MB

2 Document 10/10/2008 09:40 3 MB

3 Document 10/10/2008 09:50 4 MB 001/999

Memory
4 Document 10/10/2008 10:00 1 MB Information

5 Document 10/10/2008 10:05 2 MB Remove


Memory

Print Delete Detail Open Store File

Custom Box Job Box Removable Memory FAX Box

Status 08/08/2009 10:10

4 Remove the USB memory after Removable


Memory can be safely removed. is displayed.

6-21
Document Box

Saving Documents to USB Memory (Scan to USB)


This function allows you to store scanned image files in USB memory connected to the machine. You can store
files in PDF, TIFF, JPEG, XPS or high-compression PDF format.

NOTE: The maximum number of the storable files is 100.

Storing Documents
The procedure for storing documents in removable USB memory is explained below.

1 Plug the USB memory into the USB memory slot


(A1).

IMPORTANT: Use only USB memory that has been


formatted on this machine. If USB memory formatted on
another device is used, The removable memory is not
formatted message may appear. To format the USB
memory, press [Format].

2 When the machine reads the USB memory,


Removable Memory is recognized. Displaying files.
may appear. Press [Yes] to display the removable
memory screen.

NOTE: If the message does not appear, press the


Document Box key and then [Removable Memory].

3 Select the folder where the file will be stored and


press [Open].

The machine will display the top 3 folder levels,


including the root folder.

Removable Memory. 4 Press [Store File].

Removable Memory

Name Date and Time Size


Up
1 Document 10/10/2008 09:30 1 MB

2 Document 10/10/2008 09:40 3 MB

3 Document 10/10/2008 09:50 4 MB 001/999

Memory
4 Document 10/10/2008 10:00 1 MB Information

5 Document 10/10/2008 10:05 2 MB Remove


Memory

Print Delete Detail Open Store File

Custom Box Job Box Removable Memory FAX Box

Status 08/08/2009 10:10

5 Set the type of original, file format, etc., as desired.

6 Press the Start key. The original is scanned and the


data is stored in the USB memory.

6-22
7 Status / Job Cancel

This chapter explains how to check the status and history of jobs and cancel the jobs being
processed or waiting to be printed.

This chapter also explains how to check the remaining amount of toner and paper and the
status of devices, and how to cancel the fax communication.

• Checking Job Status ...........................................................................7-2


• Checking Job History ..........................................................................7-9
• Sending the Job Log History.............................................................7-11
• Pause and Resumption of Jobs ........................................................7-13
• Canceling of Jobs .............................................................................7-13
• Priority Override for Waiting Jobs .....................................................7-14
• Reordering Print Jobs .......................................................................7-14
• Checking the Remaining Amount of Toner and Paper......................7-15
• Device/Communication .....................................................................7-16

7-1
Status / Job Cancel

Checking Job Status


Check the status of jobs being processed or waiting to be printed.

Available Status Screens


The processing and waiting statuses of jobs are displayed as a list on the touch panel in four different screens
- Printing Jobs, Sending Jobs, Sending Jobs - Timer waiting, and Storing Jobs. The following job statuses are
available.

Screen Job statuses to be displayed

Printing Jobs • Copy


• Printer
• FAX reception
• i-FAX reception
• E-mail reception
• Printing from Document Box
• Job Report /List
• Printing data from removable memory
Sending Jobs • FAX transmission
• i-FAX transmission
• PC (SMB/FTP) transmission
• E-mail
• Application
• Multiple destination
• Sending Job FAX using Delayed transmission
Storing Jobs • Scan
• FAX
• i-FAX
• Printer
• Join Box Document
• Copy Box Document

Displaying Status Screens


Use the procedure below to display the Status screen.

1 Press the Status/Job Cancel key.

Status 2 The Status screen appears. Press either of


Status Scheduled Job Log
[Printing Jobs], [Sending Jobs], or [Storing Jobs] to
Job Type All
check the status.
Job No. Accepted Time Type Job Name User Name Status

438 14:47 abc@def.com InProcess


To check the scheduled transmission job, press
1/1
[Sending Jobs] and then [Scheduled Job].

For an explanation of the screen, refer to Details of


the Status Screens on page 7-3.
Cancel Detail

Printing Jobs Sending Jobs Storing Jobs Device/ Paper/Supplies


Communication
Status 08/08/2009 10:10

7-2
Status / Job Cancel

Details of the Status Screens

The items and keys displayed on the status screens are as follows.

For information on how to display the Status screen, see Displaying Status Screens on page 7-2.

Printing Jobs Status Screen


Status

Status Log

Job Type All 7


Job No. End Date Type Job Name User Name Result

000001 10/10 09:50 doc10102008095050 AAAAA InProcess

000002 10/10 09:55 doc10102008095510 AAAAA Waiting

000003 10/10 10:00 doc10102008091000 AAAAA Waiting 1/1

1 2 3 4 5 6
8 9 10 11 12
Pause All Cancel Priority Move Up Detail
Print Jobs Override

Printing Jobs Sending Jobs Storing Jobs Device/ Paper/Supplies


Communication
Status 08/08/2009 10:10

The table below lists the items displayed in the Printing Jobs Status screen.
7
No. Item / Key Detail

1 Job No. Acceptance No. of job

2 Accepted Time Accepted Time of job

3 Type Icons that indicate the job type

Copy job

Printer job

FAX reception

i-FAX reception

E-mail reception

Job from Document Box

Report / List

Data from Removable Memory

4 Job Name Job Name or file name

5 User Name User Name for the executed job

6 Status Status of job


InProcess: The status before starting to print.
Printing: Printing
Waiting: Print Waiting
Pause: Pausing print job or error
Canceling: Canceling the job

7-3
Status / Job Cancel

No. Item / Key Detail

7 [ ] of Job Type Sorts by specific type of job

8 [Pause All Print Jobs] Pauses all the printing jobs. By pressing this key again, the printing
jobs will be resumed.

9 [Cancel] Select the job to be canceled from the list, and press this key.

10 [Priority Override] Select the job to be overridden, and press this key.
(Refer to Priority Override for Waiting Jobs on page 7-14)

11 [Move Up] In the list, select the job that you want to move up the job queue and
press this key.
(Refer to Reordering Print Jobs on page 7-14)

12 [Detail] Select the job for displaying detailed information from the list, and
press this key. (Refer to Checking the Detailed Information of
Histories on page 7-10)

7-4
Status / Job Cancel

Sending Jobs Status screen


Status

Status Scheduled Job Log

Job Type All 7


Job No. Accepted Time Type Job Name User Name Status

438 14:47 abc@def.com InProcess

1 2 3 4 5 6
1/1

8 9
Cancel Detail

Printing Jobs Sending Jobs Storing Jobs Device/ Paper/Supplies


Communication
Status 08/08/2009 10:10

The table below lists the items displayed in the Sending Jobs Status screen.

No. Item / Key Detail

1 Job No. Acceptance No. of job

2 Accepted Time Accepted Time of job 7


3 Type Icons that indicate the job type

Sending Job FAX

Sending Job i-FAX

Sending Job PC (SMB/FTP)

Sending Job E-mail

Sending Job Application

Sending Job Multiple

4 Destination Destination (Either destination name, FAX number, E-mail address,


or server name)

5 User Name User Name for the executed job

6 Status Status of job


InProcess: The status before starting sending such as during
scanning originals
Sending: Sending
Waiting: Sending Waiting
Canceling: Canceling the job
Pause: Pausing the job

7 [ ] of Job Type Only selected type of jobs is displayed.

8 [Cancel] Select the job you want to cancel from the list, and press this key.

9 [Detail] Select the job whose detailed information you want to display from
the list, and press this key. (Refer to Checking the Detailed
Information of Histories on page 7-10)

7-5
Status / Job Cancel

Storing Jobs Status screen


Status

Status Log

Job Type All 7


Job No. Accepted Time Type Job Name User Name Status

438 14:47 doc20070225144758 InProcess

1 2 3 4 5 6
1/1

8 9
Cancel Detail

Printing Jobs Sending Jobs Storing Jobs Device/ Paper/Supplies


Communication
Status 08/08/2009 10:10

The table below lists the items displayed in the Storing Jobs Status screen.

No. Display / Key Details

1 Job No. Acceptance No. of job

2 Accepted Time Accepted Time of job

3 Type Icons that indicate the job type

Storing Job Scan

Storing Job Printer

Storing Job FAX

Storing Job i-FAX

Join Box Document

Copy Box Document

4 Job Name Job name or file name is displayed.

5 User Name User Name for the executed job

6 Status Status of job


InProcess: The status before starting to save such as during
scanning originals
Storing: Storing Data
Canceling: Canceling the job
Pause: Pausing the job

7 [ ] of Job Type Only selected type of jobs is displayed.

8 [Cancel] Select the job you want to cancel from the list, and press this key.

9 [Detail] Select the job whose detailed information you want to display from
the list, and press this key. (Refer to Checking the Detailed
Information of Histories on page 7-10)

7-6
Status / Job Cancel

Checking the Detailed Information of Jobs


Check the detailed information of each job.

Use the procedure below to check a job's information.

1 Press the Status/Job Cancel key.

2 Press [Printing Jobs], [Sending Jobs], or [Storing


Jobs].

To check the scheduled transmission, press


[Sending Jobs] and then [Scheduled Job].

Status 3 Select the job whose details you wish to check from
Status Scheduled Job Log
the list, and press [Detail].
Job Type All

Job No.

438
Accepted Time Type

14:47
Job Name

abc@def.com
User Name Status

InProcess
Detailed information of the selected job is
displayed.
1/1

7
Cancel Detail

Printing Jobs Sending Jobs Storing Jobs Device/ Paper/Supplies


Communication
Status 08/08/2009 10:10

Detail Job No.: 000080


Use [ ] or [ ] to see the next or previous page of
Job No.: Status/Destination:
Detail
information.
000080 Processing

Job Type: Destination:

Sending Job - E-mail ABCDE

User Name:

User1

Job Name:

doc20070404115151

Accepted Time:

10:10:10 1/2

Close

Status 08/08/2009 10:10

Detail Job No.: 000080


In Sending Jobs, you can check the destination by
Job No.: Status/Destination:
Detail
pressing [Detail] in Status/Destination.
000080 Processing

Job Type: Destination:

Sending Job - E-mail ABCDE

User Name:

User1

Job Name:

doc20070404115151

Accepted Time:

10:10:10 1/2

Close

Status 08/08/2009 10:10

7-7
Status / Job Cancel

Detail Job No.: 000081


Status/Destination is displayed when address is
selected. Press [Detail] to display the list.
Job Type All

Type Destination Status


Press [ ] or [ ], select a destination and press
doc20070404131415 Sending [Detail]. Information on the selected job is displayed for
User01 Waiting checking.
1/2

4 To exit from the detailed information, press [Close].

Detail

Close

Status 08/08/2009 10:10

7-8
Status / Job Cancel

Checking Job History


Check the history of completed jobs.

NOTE: Job history is also available by COMMAND CENTER or KM-NET VIEWER from the computer.

Available Job History Screens


The job histories are displayed separately in three screens - Printing Jobs, Sending Jobs, and Storing Jobs. The
following job histories are available.

Screen Job histories to be displayed

Printing Jobs • Copy


• Printer
• FAX reception
• i-FAX reception
• E-mail reception
• Printing from Document Box 7
• Job Report / List
• Printing data from removable memory

Sending Jobs • FAX


• i-FAX
• PC (SMB/FTP)
• E-mail
• Application
• Multiple destination

Storing Jobs • Scan


• FAX
• i-FAX
• Printer
• Join Box Document
• Copy Box Document

Displaying Job History Screen


The procedure for displaying Job History Screen is explained below.

1 Press the Status/Job Cancel key.

Status 2 Press either of [Printing Jobs], [Sending Jobs], or


Status Log
[Storing Jobs] to check the log, and press [Log].
Job Type All

Job No. End Date Type Job Name User Name Result

000080 01/25 14:14 doc20070225141427 Completed

000081 01/25 14:22 doc20070225142253 Completed

000082 01/25 14:23 doc20070225142310 Completed 001/001

000083 01/25 14:24 doc20070225142458 Error

000084 01/25 14:30 doc20070225143034 Completed

Detail

Printing Jobs Sending Jobs Storing Jobs Device/ Paper/Supplies


Communication
Status 08/08/2009 10:10

7-9
Status / Job Cancel

Checking the Detailed Information of Histories


Check the detailed information of each history.

Display of the detailed information of Job Finish history

Use the procedure below to check the job finish history.

1 Press the Status/Job Cancel key.

2 Press [Printing Jobs], [Sending Jobs] or [Storing


Jobs] and then [Log].

Status 3 Select the job to check details from the list, and
Status Log
press [Detail].
Job Type All

Job No. End Date Type Job Name User Name Result

000080 01/25 14:14 doc20070225141427 Completed


Detailed information of the selected job is
000081 01/25 14:22 doc20070225142253 Completed
displayed.
000082 01/25 14:23 doc20070225142310 Completed 001/001

000083 01/25 14:24 doc20070225142458 Error


NOTE: To check the information of the next/previous
000084 01/25 14:30 doc20070225143034 Completed
page, press [ ] or [ ].
Detail

Printing Jobs Sending Jobs Storing Jobs Device/ Paper/Supplies


Communication
Status 08/08/2009 10:10

4 To exit from the detailed information, press [Close].

7-10
Status / Job Cancel

Sending the Job Log History


You can send the job log history by e-mail. You can either send it manually as needed or have it sent
automatically whenever a set number of jobs is reached.

Setting the destination


Set the destination to which job log histories are sent.

Use the procedure below to set the destination.

1 Press the System Menu key.

2 Press [Report], [Next] of Sending Job Log History


and then [Change] of Destination.

3 To enter a new e-mail address, press [E-mail


Address Entry].

Press [E-mail Address], enter the destination e-


mail address and then press [OK]. 7
4 To set an address from the address book, press [E-
mail Address Book].

Press [Address Book]. Select the destination from


the address book and press [OK].

NOTE: For information on specifying destinations,


refer to Specifying Destination on page 3-28.

The selected e-mail addresses is displayed.

NOTE: You can view information on the selected


destinations by pressing [Detail].

5 Press [OK].

Automatic Job Log History Transmission


This function automatically sends the job log history to the specified destinations whenever a set number of jobs
has been logged.

Use the procedure below to set automatic job log history transmission.

1 Press the System Menu key.

2 Press [Report], [Next] of Sending Job Log History


and then [Change] of Auto Sending.

7-11
Status / Job Cancel

Report - Auto Sending


3 Press [On] and enter the number of jobs in the job
Send job log history to the specified destination after a set number of jobs log history print by using [+]/[-] or the numeric keys.
have been logged.
You can enter any number between 1 and 1500.
Off
Jobs
4 Press [OK].
(1 - 1500)
On
100

Cancel OK

Status 08/08/2009 10:10

Manual Job Log History Transmission


You can also send the job log history to the specified destinations manually.

Use the procedure below to send the job log history manually.

1 Press the System Menu key.

2 Press [Report], [Next] of Sending Job Log History


and then [Execute] of Send Job Log History.

When the confirmation screen appears, press


[Yes]. The job log history is sent.

Setting E-mail Subject


Set the subject automatically entered when sending job log histories by e-mail.

Use the procedure below to set the subject.

1 Press the System Menu key.

2 Press [Report], [Next] of Sending Job Log History


and then [Change] of Subject.

3 Enter an e-mail subject not more than 60


characters.

NOTE: Refer to the Character Entry Method on


Appendix-10 for details on entering characters.

4 Check that the entry is correct and press [OK].

7-12
Status / Job Cancel

Pause and Resumption of Jobs


Pause /resume all printing jobs in printing/waiting.

The procedure for pausing and resuming jobs is explained below.

1 Press the Status/Job Cancel key.

Status 2 Press [Pause All Print Jobs] on the Printing Jobs


Status Log
Status screen. Printing is paused.
Job Type All

Job No. End Date Type Job Name User Name Result

000001 10/10 09:50 doc10102008095050 AAAAA InProcess

000002 10/10 09:55 doc10102008095510 AAAAA Waiting

000003 10/10 10:00 doc10102008091000 AAAAA Waiting 1/1

Pause All Cancel Priority Move Up Detail


Print Jobs Override

Printing Jobs Sending Jobs Storing Jobs Device/ Paper/Supplies


Communication
Status 08/08/2009 10:10

3 When resuming the printing of jobs that have been 7


paused, press [Resume All Print Jobs].

Canceling of Jobs
For more information on canceling jobs, refer to the Canceling Jobs on page 3-40.

7-13
Status / Job Cancel

Priority Override for Waiting Jobs


Priority Override function suspends the current job and prints the job in waiting first.

The procedure for using Priority Override is explained below.

1 Press the Status/Job Cancel key.

2 Press [Printing Jobs].

Status 3 Select the job to be given priority, and press


Status Log
[Priority Override].
Job Type All

Job No. End Date Type Job Name User Name Result

000001 10/10 09:50 doc10102008095050 AAAAA InProcess

000002 10/10 09:55 doc10102008095510 AAAAA Waiting

000003 10/10 10:00 doc10102008091000 AAAAA Waiting 1/1

Pause All Cancel Priority Move Up Detail


Print Jobs Override

Printing Jobs Sending Jobs Storing Jobs Device/ Paper/Supplies


Communication
Status 08/08/2009 10:10

4 Press [Yes] in the confirmation screen. The current


job in printing is suspended, and the job for
override printing starts.

5 When the Priority Override is completed, the


printing job that has been suspended will be
resumed.

Reordering Print Jobs


This function allows you to select a queued print job and raise its output priority.

The procedure for reordering print jobs is explained below.

1 Press the Status/Cancel key.

2 Press the [Printing Jobs].

Status 3 Select the job to be assigned a higher priority and


Status Log
press [Move Up].
Job Type All
The priority of the selected job is increased by 1 .
Job No. End Date Type Job Name User Name Result

000001 10/10 09:50 doc10102008095050 AAAAA InProcess

000002 10/10 09:55 doc10102008095510 AAAAA Waiting


To further raise the job's priority, press [Move Up]
000003 10/10 10:00 doc10102008091000 AAAAA Waiting 1/1
again. Each time you press [Move Up], the priority
increases by 1.

Pause All Cancel Priority Move Up Detail


Print Jobs Override

Printing Jobs Sending Jobs Storing Jobs Device/ Paper/Supplies


Communication
Status 08/08/2009 10:10

7-14
Status / Job Cancel

Checking the Remaining Amount of Toner and Paper


Check the remaining amount of toner, paper, and staples on the touch panel.

Use the procedure below to check the remaining amounts.

1 Press the Status/Job Cancel key.

Status 2 Press [Paper/Supplies].Check the remaining


amount of toner and the status of a waste toner box
in Toner Information, and the remaining amount of
paper in each paper source in Paper.

Toner Information Paper Others


Toner Status Size Type Status Type Status
Black (K) 100% Ledger Plain 30% Staple A OK
Waste Toner OK Ledger Plain 30%
Letter Plain 30%
Letter Plain 30%
Letter Plain 0%

Printing Jobs Sending Jobs Storing Jobs Device/ Paper/Supplies


Communication
Status 08/08/2009 10:10

The items you can check are described below. 7


Remaining amount of toner

You can check the remaining amount of each color toner as one of 11 levels from 100 to 0%.

Status of waste toner box

You can check the status of waste toner box.

Paper

You can check the size, orientation, type, and remaining amount of paper in each paper source.The remaining
amount of paper is shown by 11 levels from 100 to 0%, however, the paper in the multi purpose tray is shown
by 2 levels as 100% and 0%.

Others

You can check the status of staples.

NOTE: If the optional built-in finisher or document finisher are installed, the Others section provides whether
or not staples are available.

7-15
Status / Job Cancel

Device/Communication
Configure the devices/lines installed or connected to this machine or check their status. You can also control
devices depending on their status.

Displaying Device/Communication Screen


The procedure for using the Device/Communication screen is explained below.

1 Press the Status/Job Cancel key.

2 Press [Device/Communication].

The screen to check the status or configure the


devices is displayed.

Check of Device Status


Status

Scanner Hard Disk


Ready. Overwriting...

Printer
Ready.

Removable Memory 䝯䝰䝸䜹䞊䝗


Not connected.

Format Remove

FAX Port 1 FAX Port 2


Dialing... Receiving...

Line Off Manual RX Line Off

FAX Log i-FAX Check New FAX

Printing Jobs Sending Jobs Storing Jobs Device/ Paper/Supplies


Communication
Status 08/08/2009 10:10

The items you can check are described below.

Scanner

The status of an original scanning in the document processor (optional) or the error information (paper jam,
opened cover, etc.) is displayed.

Printer

Error information such as paper jam, out of toner, or out of paper, and status such as waiting or printing are
displayed.

Hard Disk

The information such as formatting, overwriting for erasure, and error occurrence is displayed.

7-16
Status / Job Cancel

Configuring the Devices


Status

Scanner Hard Disk


Ready. Overwriting...

Printer
Ready.

Removable Memory 䝯䝰䝸䜹䞊䝗


Not connected.

Format Remove

FAX Port 1 FAX Port 2


Dialing... Receiving...

Line Off Manual RX Line Off

FAX Log i-FAX Check New FAX

Printing Jobs Sending Jobs Storing Jobs Device/ Paper/Supplies


Communication
Status 08/08/2009 10:10

Detailed information on controlling devices is given below.

Removable Memory (USB Memory)


• The usage and capacity of the external media connected to this machine are displayed.
• Press [Format] to format external media. 7
• Press [Remove] to safely remove the external media. For details, refer to Removing the USB Memory in the
next section.

FAX Port 1, FAX Port 2


• The information such as sending/receiving and dialing is displayed.
• Press [Line Off] to cancel a fax in sending/receiving. For details, refer to Canceling FAX Communication on
page 7-18 in the section afterwards.
• Press [Manual RX] to start a fax. Use this function when you want to talk to the sender before receiving the
fax originals. For details, refer to the Operation Guide of FAX kit.
• Press [Log] to display the fax transmission history. For details, refer to the Operation Guide of FAX kit.

Removing the USB Memory


There is a way to remove the USB memory safely.

Use the procedure below to remove the USB memory.

1 Press the Status/Job Cancel key.

Status 2 Press [Device/Communication] > [Remove] in


Scanner
Ready.
Hard Disk
Overwriting...
Removable Memory.
Printer
Ready.

Removable Memory 䝯䝰䝸䜹䞊䝗


Not connected.

Format Remove

FAX Port 1 FAX Port 2


Dialing... Receiving...

Line Off Manual RX Line Off

FAX Log i-FAX Check New FAX

Printing Jobs Sending Jobs Storing Jobs Device/ Paper/Supplies


Communication
Status 08/08/2009 10:10

3 When Device can be removed safely. is displayed,


remove the USB memory.

7-17
Status / Job Cancel

Canceling FAX Communication


Cancel fax communication.

Use the procedure below to cancel the fax communication.

1 Press the Status/Job Cancel key.

Status 2 Press [Device/Communication] > [Line Off] in FAX


Scanner
Ready.
Hard Disk
Overwriting...
Port 1 or FAX Port 2.
Printer
Ready.

Removable Memory 䝯䝰䝸䜹䞊䝗


Not connected.

Format Remove

FAX Port 1 FAX Port 2


Dialing... Receiving...

Line Off Manual RX Line Off

FAX Log i-FAX Check New FAX

Printing Jobs Sending Jobs Storing Jobs Device/ Paper/Supplies


Communication
Status 08/08/2009 10:10

3 Press [Yes] in the confirmation screen. The line is


disconnected, and the fax communication is
canceled.

7-18
8 Default Setting (System Menu)

This chapter explains how to configure various settings of the machine using the menus on
the operation panel.

• Common Settings ...............................................................................8-2


• Copy Settings....................................................................................8-25
• Sending Settings...............................................................................8-28
• Document Box Settings ....................................................................8-31
• Printer Settings .................................................................................8-33
• Printing Reports/Sending Notice.......................................................8-38
• Adjustment/Maintenance ..................................................................8-41
• Date/Timer ........................................................................................8-46
• Editing Destination (Address Book/Adding One Touch Keys)...........8-51
• Internet Browser Setup .....................................................................8-58
• Applications.......................................................................................8-60
• System Initialization ..........................................................................8-63
• Restarting the System.......................................................................8-63
• Network Setup ..................................................................................8-64
• Secure Protocol ................................................................................8-69
• Interface Block Setting ......................................................................8-72
• Security Level (Security Level setting)..............................................8-73
• Document Guard Setting ..................................................................8-73
• Optional Functions ............................................................................8-75
• Accessibility Display (Enlarged Touch Panel Display) ......................8-76

8-1
Default Setting (System Menu)

Common Settings
Common settings include;

• Switching the Language for Display [Language] …8-2


• Default Screen …8-2
• Sound …8-3
• Original/Paper Settings …8-4
• Switching Unit of Measurement …8-11
• Error Handling …8-12
• Paper Output …8-13
• Orientation Confirmation …8-14
• Function Defaults …8-14

NOTE: If user login administration is enabled, you can only change the settings by logging in with
administrator privileges.

Switching the Language for Display [Language]


Select the language displayed on the touch panel.

Use the procedure below to select the language.

1 Press the System Menu key.

2 Press [Common Settings] and then [Change] of Language.

3 Press the key for the language you want to use.

4 Press [OK].

The touch panel language will be changed.

Default Screen
Select the screen appearing right after start-up (default screen). The options are as follows.

The table below lists the available screens.

Item Description

Copy The Copy screen (the screen shown when the Copy key is pressed)
appears.

Send The Send screen (the screen shown when the Send key is pressed)
appears.

Status The Status/Job Cancel screen (the screen shown when the Status/
Job Cancel key is pressed) appears.

8-2
Default Setting (System Menu)

Item Description

Document Box The Document Box screen (the screen shown when the Document
Box key is pressed) appears.

Program The Program screen (the screen shown when the Program key is
pressed) appears.

Application The Application selecting screen (the screen shown when the
Application key is pressed) appears.

Accessibility Copy The Accessibility Copy screen (the screen shown when the
Accessibility Display key is pressed in the Copy screen) appears.

Accessibility Send The Accessibility Send screen (the screen shown when the
Accessibility Display key is pressed in the Send screen) appears.

Application name Each application is activated and the initial screen appears.
(Maximum 6 applications)
For example, Internet Browser

Use the procedure below to select the default startup screen.

1 Press the System Menu key.

2 Press [Common Settings] and then [Change] of Default Screen.


8
3 Select the screen to be displayed as the default screen.

NOTE: The application names appear if the applications are installed and officially licensed on.

4 Press [OK].

Sound
Set options for buzzer sound during the machine operations.

The table below lists the buzzer types and their settings and details.

Item Value Description

Volume 0 (Mute), 1 (Minimum) to Set the buzzer volume level.


5 (Maximum)

Key Confirmation Off, On Emit a sound when the control panel


and touch panel keys are pressed.

Job Finish Off, On Emit a sound when a print job is


normally completed.

Ready Off, On Emit a sound when the warm-up is


completed.

Warning Off, On Emit a sound when errors occur.

8-3
Default Setting (System Menu)

Use the procedure below to set the sound options.

1 Press the System Menu key.

2 Press [Common Settings], [Next] of Sound and then [Next] of Buzzer.

3 Press [Change] of Volume, Key Confirmation, Job Finish, Ready, or Warning.

4 Select the buzzer volume level, or other sound options.

Original/Paper Settings
Register additional types and sizes of originals and paper.

Custom Original Size Setup

Set up frequently-used custom original sizes. The custom size options are displayed on the screen to select
original size. The dimensions available are as follows.

The table below lists the sizes that can be registered.

Input units Dimensions

Inch models X: 2 to 17" (in 0.01" increments)


Y: 2 to 11.69" (in 0.01" increments)

Metric models X: 50 to 432 mm (in 1 mm increments)


Y: 50 to 297 mm (in 1 mm increments)

Up to four custom original sizes can be added. Use the procedure below to set a custom original size.

1 Press the System Menu key.

2 Press [Common Settings], [Next] of Original / Paper Settings and then [Next] of Custom Original Size.

3 Press [Change] of any one of Custom 1 to Custom 4, on which you wish to register the size.

4 Press [On], and then press [+],[–] or numeric keys to enter X(horizontal) and Y (vertical) dimensions.

5 Press [OK].

6 Move to the copy, send, or document box screen and press the Reset key.

Adding a Custom Size and Media Type for Paper to Print

Set up a maximum of four frequently-used custom paper sizes. The custom size options are displayed on the
screen to select paper set in the multi purpose tray.

The table below lists the sizes that can be registered.

Input units Dimensions

Inch models H: 5.83 to 17" (in 0.01" increments)


V: 3.86 to 11.69" (in 0.01" increments)

Metric models H: 148 to 432 mm (in 1 mm increments)


V: 98 to 297 mm (in 1 mm increments)

8-4
Default Setting (System Menu)

Up to four custom paper sizes can be added.

Select media type for each paper size.

Media type: Plain, Transparency, Rough, Vellum, Labels, Recycled, Preprinted, Bond, Cardstock, Color,
Prepunched, Letterhead, Thick, Envelope, High Quality, Custom 1-8

NOTE: Refer to Paper Weight on page 8-7 for Custom 1-8 for media type.

Use the procedure below to select a custom paper size and media type.

1 Press the System Menu key.

2 Press [Common Settings], [Next] of Original / Paper Settings and then [Next] of Custom Paper Size.

3 Press [Change] of any one of Custom 1 to Custom 4, on which you want to register the size.

4 Press [On], and then press [+],[–] or numeric keys to enter X (horizontal) and Y (vertical) dimensions.

5 Press [Media Type] to select the type of paper and press [OK] if necessary.

6 Press [OK].

7 Move to the copy or document box screen and press the Reset key.

Paper Size and Media Type Setup for Cassettes


8
Select paper size and media type for Cassette 1, 2 and optional paper feeders (Cassette 3 and 4).

The available paper sizes and media types are shown in the table below.

Item Description

Paper Auto Automatically detect paper size. Select Metric or Inch for paper size.
Size
Standard Available options are as follows:
Sizes 1 Inch models: Ledger, Legal, Letter, Letter-R, Statement-R, 8.5×13.5", Oficio II
Metric models: A3, B4, A4, A4-R, B5, B5-R, A5-R, Folio

Standard Select a standard size except that selected in Standard Sizes 1.


Sizes 2 Inch models: A3, B4, A4, A4-R, A5-R, B5, B5-R, Folio, 8K, 16K, 16K-R
Metric models: Ledger, Legal, Letter, Letter-R, Statement-R, 8.5×13.5", Oficio
II, 8K, 16K, 16K-R

Media Type Plain (105 g/m2 or less), Rough, Vellum (64 g/m2 or less), Recycled,
Preprint**, Bond*, Color, Prepunched**, Letterhead**,
Thick (106 g/m2 and more), High Quality, Custom 1-8*

* To change to a media type other than Plain, refer to Paper Weight on page 8-7. When the paper weight
settings shown below are selected, the media indicated for each setting cannot be selected.
• Custom 1 to 8: Heavy3 or Extra Heavy
** To print on preprinted or prepunched paper or on letterhead, refer to Special Paper Action on page 8-10.

8-5
Default Setting (System Menu)

Use the procedure below to select the paper size and media type for each cassette.

1 Press the System Menu key.

2 Press [Common Settings], [Next] of Original / Paper Settings, [Next] of Cassette Setting, [Next] of Cassette
1 to Cassette 4, on which you want to register the size, and then [Change] of Paper Size.

3 To detect paper size automatically, press [Auto] and select Metric or Inch for Paper Size.

To select paper size, press [Standard Sizes 1] or [Standard Sizes 2] for Paper Size.

4 Press [OK]. The previous screen reappears.

5 Press [Change] of Media Type to select media type and press [OK].

Paper Size and Media Type Setup for Multi Purpose Tray

Select size and media type for multi purpose tray. Set up frequently-used size and media type before use.

The available paper sizes and media types are shown in the table below.

Item Description

Paper Auto Automatically detect paper size. Select Metric or Inch for paper size.
Size
Standard Available options are as follows:
Sizes 1 Inch models: Ledger, Legal, Letter, Letter-R, Statement-R, 8.5×13.5", Oficio II,
Executive
Metric models: A3, B4, A4, A4-R, B5, B5-R, A5-R, B6-R, A6-R, Folio
Standard Select a standard size except that selected in Standard Sizes 1.
Sizes 2 Inch models: A3, B4, A4, A4-R, B5, B5-R, A5-R, B6-R, A6-R, Folio, 8K, 16K, 16K-R
Metric models: Ledger, Legal, Letter, Letter-R, Statement-R, 8.5×13.5", Oficio II,
Executive, 8K, 16K, 16K-R
Others Select special standard sizes or custom sizes*.
ISO B5, Envelope #10 (Commercial #10), Envelope #9 (Commercial #9), Envelope
#6 (Commercial #6 3/4), Envelope Monarch, Envelope DL, Envelope C5, Envelope
C4, Hagaki, Oufuku Hagaki, Youkei 4, Youkei 2
Size Enter a size not displayed in the standard sizes.
Entry Inch models:
H: 5.83 to 17" (in 0.01" increments)
V: 3.86 to 11.69" (in 0.01" increments)
Metric models:
V: 98 to 297 mm (in 1 mm increments)
H: 148 to 432 mm (in 1 mm increments)
Media Type Plain (105 g/m2 or less), Transparency, Rough, Vellum (64 g/m2 or less), Labels,
Recycled, Preprint**, Bond, Cardstock, Color, Prepunched**, Letterhead**,
Envelope, Thick (106 g/m2 and more), High Quality, Custom 1-8**
* Refer to Adding a Custom Size and Media Type for Paper to Print on page 8-4 for selecting Custom 1- 4 for
Custom Paper Size.
** Refer to Paper Weight on page 8-7 for selecting Custom 1- 8 from Media Type.
To print on preprinted or prepunched paper or on letterhead, refer to Special Paper Action on page 8-10.

NOTE: To change to a media type other than Plain, refer to Paper Weight on page 8-7

8-6
Default Setting (System Menu)

Use the procedure below to select the paper size and media type for manual paper feed.

1 Press the System Menu key.

2 Press [Common Settings], [Next] of Original / Paper Settings, [Next] of MP Tray Setting and then [Change]
of Paper Size.

3 To detect paper size automatically, press [Auto] and select Metric or Inch for Paper Size.

To select paper size, press [Standard Sizes 1], [Standard Sizes 2], [Others] or [Size Entry] for Paper Size.

If you select [Size Entry], press [+], [–] to enter X (horizontal) and Y (vertical) dimensions.

Press [# Keys] to enter the paper size using the numeric keys.

4 Press [OK]. The previous screen reappears.

5 Press [Change] of Media Type to select the media type and press [OK].

Paper Weight

Select weight for each media type. The options for media type and weight of paper are as follows.

Paper types and weights

Y: Available N: Not available


8
Extra
Paper Weight Light Normal 1 Normal 2 Normal 3 Heavy 1 Heavy 2 Heavy 3
Heavy

Weight (g/m2), 64 g/m2 60 g/m2 76 g/m2 91 g/m2 106 g/m2 136 g/m2 171 g/m2 Transpar-
Media type or less to to to to to and more encies
75 g/m2 90 g/m2 105 g/m2 135 g/m2 170 g/m2

Plain Y Y Y (default) Y N N N N
Transparency N N N N Y Y Y Y (default)

Rough Y Y Y Y (default) Y Y Y* N
Vellum Y (default) Y Y Y N N N N
Labels Y Y Y Y Y (default) Y Y Y
Recycled Y Y Y (default) Y N N N N
Preprinted Y Y Y (default) Y N N N N
Bond Y Y Y Y (default) Y Y Y* N
Cardstock N N N N Y Y (default) Y Y
Color Y Y Y (default) Y N N N N
Prepunched Y Y Y (default) Y N N N N
Letterhead Y Y Y (default) Y N N N N
Thick N N N N Y Y (default) Y* Y*
Envelope N N N N Y Y (default) Y Y

8-7
Default Setting (System Menu)

Extra
Paper Weight Light Normal 1 Normal 2 Normal 3 Heavy 1 Heavy 2 Heavy 3
Heavy

High Quality Y Y Y (default) Y N N N N


Custom 1-8 Y Y Y (default) Y Y Y Y* Y*

* When Heavy 3 or Extra Heavy is selected, the media type cannot be selected for the cassettes.

For Custom 1-8, settings for duplex printing and media type name can be changed.

Item Description

Duplex Prohibit Duplex printing not allowed.

Permit Duplex printing allowed.

Name Change names for Custom 1-8. Names should be not more
than 15 characters. Selecting media type at multi purpose
tray, the name after change will be displayed.

Use the procedure below to set the paper weight.

1 Press the System Menu key.

2 Press [Common Settings], [Next] of Original / Paper Settings and then [Next] of Media Type Setting.

3 Press [Next] for the media type whose weight you want to change.

4 Press [Change] of Paper Weight.

5 Select the weight and press [OK].

6 Press [Close].

The previous screen reappears.

7 To change the duplex printing settings for Custom 1 (-8), press [Next] of Custom 1(-8) and then [Change]
of Duplex. Select [Prohibit] or [Permit] and press [OK].

The previous screen reappears.

8 Press [Close].

9 To change the name for Custom 1(-8), press [Next] of Custom 1(-8) and then [Change] of Name. Enter the
name and press [OK].

NOTE: Refer to the Character Entry Method on page Appendix-10 for details on entering characters.

8-8
Default Setting (System Menu)

Default Paper Source

Select the default paper source from Cassette 1-4 and Multi Purpose Tray.

NOTE: [Cassette 3] and [Cassette 4] are displayed when the optional paper feeder is installed.

Use the procedure below to select the default paper source.

1 Press the System Menu key.

2 Press [Common Settings], [Next] of Original / Paper Settings and then [Change] of Default Paper Source.

3 Select a paper cassette for the default setting.

4 Press [OK].

5 Move to the copy or document box screen and press the Reset key.

Automatic Detection of Originals (Available for metric models only)

Automatically detect originals of special or non-standard size.

The table below lists the special or non-standard original sizes.

Item Description
8
A6/Hagaki As A6 and Hagaki are similar in size, select either one of them for
automatic detection.

Folio Select Folio for automatic detection.

11x15" Select the 11×15" size for automatic detection.

Use the procedure below to set automatic detection of originals.

1 Press the System Menu key.

2 Press [Common Settings], [Next] of Original / Paper Settings and then [Change] of Original Auto Detect.

3 Select [A6] or [Hagaki] of A6/Hagaki.

Select [Off] to disable automatic detection or [On] to enable automatic detection of Folio and 11x15"
respectively.

4 Press [OK].

Media for Auto Selection

Select a default media type for auto paper selection when [Auto] is selected of Paper Selection. If Plain is
selected, the paper source with plain paper loaded in the specific size is selected. Select [All Media Types] for
the paper source with any kind of paper loaded in the specific size.

Use the procedure below to select the paper size and media type used by Auto Selection.

1 Press the System Menu key.

2 Press [Common Settings], [Next] of Original / Paper Settings and then [Change] of Media for Auto (B & W).

8-9
Default Setting (System Menu)

3 Select [All Media Types] or any media type for paper selection.

4 Press [OK].

Paper Source for Cover Paper

Select paper source for cover paper from Cassette 1-4 or Multi Purpose Tray. Cover is used for Booklet (see
page 4-19) and Cover (see page 4-21) modes.

NOTE: [Cassette 3] and [Cassette 4] are displayed when the optional paper feeder is installed.

Use the procedure below to select the paper source for the cover.

1 Press the System Menu key.

2 Press [Common Settings], [Next] of Original / Paper Settings, [ ] and then [Change] of Paper Source for
Cover.

3 Select the paper source to load cover paper.

4 Press [OK].

Special Paper Action

When printing on Prepunched, Preprint, and Letterhead, punch-holes might not be aligned or the print direction
might be upside-down depending on how originals are set and the combination of copying functions. In such a
case, select [Adjust Print Direction] to adjust the print direction. When paper orientation is not important, select
[Speed Priority].

The table below lists the available settings and their details.

Item Description

Adjust Print Direction Adjust print direction. Print speed is a little slower. Select this item to
print on Prepunched, Preprint and Letterhead.

Speed Priority Give the job speed top priority and disregard the paper orientation.
Select this item when paper orientation is not important.

8-10
Default Setting (System Menu)

If you select [Adjust Print Direction], load paper according to the steps below.

Example: copying on Letterhead

Original Paper Finished Cassette Multi Purpose Tray

Original Paper Finished Cassette Multi Purpose Tray

NOTE: When loading cover paper in a cassette or multi purpose tray, load the face, on which printing is
supposed to be done, upward.

Use the procedure below to specify the actions performed for special paper types.

1 Press the System Menu key.


8
2 Press [Common Settings], [Next] of Original / Paper Settings, [ ] and then [Change] of Special Paper
Action.

3 Select [Adjust Print Direction] or [Speed Priority].

4 Press [OK].

Switching Unit of Measurement


Select inch or metric for the unit for paper dimensions.

Use the procedure below to change the input units.

1 Press the System Menu key.

2 Press [Common Settings] and then [Change] of Measurement.

3 Select [mm] for metric or [inch] for inch.

4 Press [OK].

8-11
Default Setting (System Menu)

Error Handling
Select whether to cancel or continue the job when error has occurred. The possible errors and what to do for
the errors are as follows.

Duplexing Error

Select what to do when duplex printing is not possible for the selected paper size and media type.

Item Description

1-sided Printed in 1-sided

Display Error Error message to cancel printing is displayed.

Finishing Error

Select alternative actions when finishing (stapling or offsetting) is not available for the selected paper size or
media type.

Processing Description

Ignore The setting is ignored and the job is printed.

Display Error Error message to cancel printing is displayed.

No Staple Error

Select what to do when staples run out during printing.

Item Description

Ignore Printing continues without stapling.

Display Error Error message to cancel printing is displayed.

NOTE: The messages are displayed when the optional built-in finisher or document finisher is installed.

Stapling Limit Error

Select what to do when stapling capacity is exceeded during printing.

Item Description

Ignore Printing continues without stapling.

Display Error Error message to cancel printing is displayed

NOTE: The messages are displayed when the optional built-in finisher or document finisher is installed.

8-12
Default Setting (System Menu)

Paper Mismatch Error

Select what to do when the selected paper size or type does not match paper size or type loaded in the specified
paper source while printing from the computer by specifying the cassette or multi-purpose tray.

Processing Description

Ignore The setting is ignored and the job is printed.

Display Error Error message to cancel printing is displayed.

Use the procedure below to specify the settings for error handling.

1 Press the System Menu key.

2 Press [Common Settings] and then [Next] of Error Handling.

3 Press [Change] at the error you wish to change the handling.

4 Select the error handling method in the selection screen for each of the errors and then press [OK].

5 The previous screen appears. To set the handling for a different error, repeat steps 3 and 4.

Paper Output
8
Select output tray respectively for copy jobs, print jobs from Custom Box, computers, and FAX RX data. The
options are as follows.

Output Tray Descriptions

Top Tray Delivery on Top Tray of the machine.

Finisher Tray* Delivery on Tray set to the optional built-in finisher or document finisher.

Job Separator Delivery on the optional job separator.


* Select [Face Up] (print surface up) or [Face Down] (print surface down) for paper orientation at output.

NOTE: The optional job separator, built-in finisher, or document finisher are required.
FAX RX data output can be specified when the optional fax kit is installed.

Use the procedure below to select the output tray.

1 Press the System Menu key.

2 Press [Common Settings] and then [Next] of Paper Output.

3 Press [Change] of Copy/Custom Box, Printer, or FAX Port 1 or FAX Port 2.

NOTE: FAX Port 1 appears when the optional fax kit is installed. If you have 2 optional fax kits installed, Fax
Port 2 appears. You can specify the output tray for the second kit (Dual FAX).

8-13
Default Setting (System Menu)

4 Select Output Tray.

For [Finisher Tray], select [Face Up] (print surface up) or [Face Down] (print surface down) as the paper
orientation at output.

5 Press [OK].

6 When selecting [Face Up] (print surface up) as the paper orientation at output, press [Page Order with Face
Up] and then select the order of the output pages from [Ascending] or [Descending].

NOTE: Selecting [Descending] accelerates the starting time of copying.

7 When changing the output tray of Copy/Custom Box, move to the copy or document box screen and press
the Reset key.

Orientation Confirmation
Select whether to display a screen for selecting the orientation of the originals to be placed on the platen when
using the following functions. (For more information, refer to page 4-10 for Original Orientation.)
• Duplex • Memo mode
• Margin/Centering originals • Page numbering
• Border erase • Booklets
• Combine mode • Staple (optional feature)

Orientation Confirmation Setting


Use the procedure below to select the default Orientation Confirmation setting.

1 Press the System Menu key.

2 Press [Common Settings] and [Change] of Orientation Confirmation.

3 Select the default for [Off] or [On].

4 Press [OK].

Function Defaults
Defaults are the values automatically set after the warm-up is completed or the Reset key is pressed.

Set the defaults for available settings such as copying and sending. Setting the frequently-used values as
defaults makes subsequent jobs easier.

IMPORTANT: When you have changed the defaults, to enable the change immediately, move to the copy, send,
or document box screen and press the Reset key.

8-14
Default Setting (System Menu)

Original Orientation

Set the original orientation defaults. The available default settings are shown below.

Item Description

Top Edge Top Select the original's top edge at the top.

Top Edge Left Select the original's top edge at the left.

Refer to page 4-10 for Original Orientation.

Use the procedure below to select the default orientation when originals are placed on the platen.

1 Press the System Menu key.

2 Press [Common Settings], [ ], [Next] of Function Defaults and then [Change] of Original Orientation.

3 Select [Top Edge Top] or [Top Edge Left] for the default.

4 Press [OK].

Continuous Scan

Set the continuous scan defaults. The available default settings are shown below. 8
Item Description

Off Continuous scan not performed

On Continuous scan performed

Refer to page 4-10 for Original Orientation.

Use the procedure below to select the default settings for continuous scanning.

1 Press the System Menu key.

2 Press [Common Settings], [ ], [Next] of Function Defaults and then [Change] of Continuous Scan.

3 Select [Off] or [On] for the default.

Use the procedure below to select the default quality setting for originals.

4 Press [OK].

Original Image

Set the default original document type. The available default settings are shown below.

Item Description

Text+Photo Text and photos together.

Photo For photos taken with a camera.

8-15
Default Setting (System Menu)

Item Description

Text Only text, no photos.

for OCR Image quality suitable for OCR software.*

Printed Document For documents printed from this machine.

* This function is only available for black and white mode.

Use the procedure below to select the default quality setting for originals.

1 Press the System Menu key.

2 Press [Common Settings], [ ], [Next] of Function Defaults and then [Change] of Original Image.

3 Select the default original image.

4 Press [OK].

Scan Resolution

Select the default scanning resolution. The options are 600x600dpi, 400x400dpi Ultra Fine, 300x300dpi,
200x400dpi Super Fine, 200x200dpi Fine, 200x100dpi Normal.

Use the procedure below to select the default resolution setting.

1 Press the System Menu key.

2 Press [Common Settings], [ ], [Next] of Function Defaults and then [Change] of Scan Resolution.

3 Select the default resolution.

4 Press [OK].

Color Selection

Select the default color mode for scanning documents. The available default settings are shown below.

Color mode Description

Auto Color (Color/Gray) Automatically recognize whether the document is color or black
and white, and scan color documents in Full Color and black and
white documents in Grayscale.

Auto Color (Color/B & W) Automatically recognize whether the document is color or black
and white, and scan color documents in Full Color and black and
white documents in Black and White.

Full Color Scan document in full color.

Grayscale Scan document in grayscale for smoother and finer finish.

Black & White Scan document in black and white. File size is smaller than Full
Color or Grayscale.

Use the procedure below to select the default color mode.

1 Press the System Menu key.

8-16
Default Setting (System Menu)

2 Press [Common Settings], [ ], [Next] of Function Defaults and then [Change] of Color Selection.

3 Select the default color mode.

4 Press [OK].

File Format

Select the default file type to send the scanned originals. The available default settings are shown below.

Item Description

PDF Send files in PDF format.

TIFF Send files in TIFF format.

JPEG Send files in JPEG format.

XPS Send files in XPS format.

High Comp. PDF Send files in High Comp. PDF format (refer to page 5-14).

NOTE: Refer to page 5-12 for file formats.

Use the procedure below to select the default file format.


8
1 Press the System Menu key.

2 Press [Common Settings], [ ], [Next] of Function Defaults and then [Change] of File Format.

3 Select the default file format.

4 Press [OK].

File Separation

Select the default file separation setting. The available default settings are shown below.

Item Description

Off No file separation performed (all the pages are compiled in one file).

Each Page Each scanned page is created into a separate file.

NOTE: Refer to page 5-13 for file separation.

Use the procedure below to select the default file separation.

1 Press the System Menu key.

2 Press [Common Settings], [ ], [Next] of Function Defaults and then [Change] of File Separation.

3 Select the default for [Off] or [Each Page].

Press [OK].

8-17
Default Setting (System Menu)

Density

Set the default density. The available default settings are shown below.

Item Description

Manual (Normal 0) Set to (Normal 0) in the Manual density.

Auto Set to Auto density.

Use the procedure below to select the default density.

1 Press the System Menu key.

2 Press [Common Settings], [ ], [Next] of Function Defaults, [ ] and then [Change] of Density.

3 Select the default density.

4 Press [OK].

Zoom

Select the enlarged/reduced default when paper size/sending size changed after the originals set. The available
default settings are shown below.

Item Description

100% Copy (send/save) at actual size (100%).

Auto Automatically reduce or enlarge the originals to match paper size/


sending size.

Use the procedure below to select the default zoom setting.

1 Press the System Menu key.

2 Press [Common Settings], [ ], [Next] of Function Defaults, [ ] and then [Change] of Zoom.

3 Select the default zoom setting.

4 Press [OK].

File Name Entry

Set an automatically entered name (default) for jobs. Additional information such as Date and Time and Job No.
can also be set.

NOTE: Refer to page 4-35 and page 5-25 for name entry.

Use the procedure below to set the default file name.

1 Press the System Menu key.

2 Press [Common Settings], [ ], [Next] of Function Defaults, [ ] and then [Change] of File Name Entry.

3 Press [File Name] to enter the file name in not more than 32 characters.

8-18
Default Setting (System Menu)

NOTE: Refer to the Character Entry Method on page Appendix-10 for details on entering characters.

4 Press [OK].

5 Press [Date and Time] to add the date/time to the job, or press [Job No.] to add the job number to the job.
The added information will be displayed in Additional Info.

6 Press [OK].

E-mail Subject/Body

Set the subject and body automatically entered (default subject and body) when sending the scanned originals
by E-mail.

NOTE: Refer to Send as E-mail on page 3-22.

Use the procedure below to set the default e-mail subject and message body.

1 Press the System Menu key.

2 Press [Common Settings], [ ], [Next] of Function Defaults, [ ], and then [Change] of E-mail Subject/Body.

3 Press [Subject] to enter an E-mail subject not more than 60 characters. 8


NOTE: Refer to the Character Entry Method on page Appendix-10 for details on entering characters.

4 Press [OK].

5 Press [Body] to enter an E-mail Body not more than 500 characters.

6 Press [OK].

7 Check that the entries are correct and press [OK].

Border Erase Default

Set the default width to be erased as a border. The table below shows the measurement ranges that can be set.

Input units Range

Inch 0 to 2" (in 0.01" increments)

Metric 0 mm to 50 mm (in 1 mm increments)

NOTE: Refer to page 4-17 and page 5-23 for Border Erase.

Use the procedure below to set the default border erase width.

1 Press the System Menu key.

2 Press [Common Settings], [ ], [Next] of Function Defaults, [ ] and then [Change] of Border Erase Default.

3 Press [+] or [–] for the Border and Gutter width to erase.

8-19
Default Setting (System Menu)

You can use the numeric keys to enter the number directly.

4 Press [OK].

Border Erase to Back Page

Select the Border Erase Method for Back Page of a sheet. The table below shows the available settings.

Item Description

Same as Front Page Border Erase performed in the same setting as the front page

Do Not Erase No Border Erase performed on the back page

NOTE: Refer to page 4-17 and page 5-23 for Border Erase.

Use the procedure below to specify the border erase setting for the back of the page.

1 Press the System Menu key.

2 Press [Common Settings], [ ], [Next] of Function Defaults, [ ] and then [Change] of Border Erase to Back
Page.

3 Press [Same as Front Page] or [Do Not Erase].

4 Press [OK].

Margin Default

Set the default margin. The table below shows the measurement ranges that can be set.

Input units Range

Inch -0.75 to 0.75" (in 0.01" increments)

Metric -18 mm to 18 mm (in 1 mm increments)

Use the procedure below to set the default margin width.

1 Press the System Menu key.

2 Press [Common Settings], [ ], [Next] of Function Defaults, [ ] and then [Change] of Margin Default.

3 Use the [+] or [-] to enter the margin widths for Left/Right and Top/Bottom.

You can use the numeric keys to enter the number directly.

4 Press [OK].

8-20
Default Setting (System Menu)

Auto Image Rotation

Select the default Auto Image Rotation setting. The table below shows the available settings.

Item Description

Off No Auto Image Rotation performed.

On Auto Image Rotation performed.

NOTE: Refer to page 4-32 for Auto Image Rotation.

Use the procedure below to set the default Auto Image Rotation settings.

1 Press the System Menu key.

2 Press [Common Settings], [ ], [Next] of Function Defaults, [ ] and then [Change] of Auto Image Rotation.

3 Select the default for [Off] or [On].

4 Press [OK].

EcoPrint
8
Select the EcoPrint default. The table below shows the available settings.

Item Description

Off No EcoPrint performed.

On EcoPrint performed.

NOTE: Refer to page 4-13 for EcoPrint.

Use the procedure below to set the default EcoPrint setting.

1 Press the System Menu key.

2 Press [Common Settings], [ ], [Next] of Function Defaults, [ ] twice, and then [Change] of EcoPrint.

3 Select [Off] or [On] for the default.

4 Press [OK].

8-21
Default Setting (System Menu)

PDF/TIFF/JPEG Image

Select the default PDF/TIFF/JPEG file quality. Five options are available from 1 Low Quality (High Comp.) to 5
High Quality (Low Comp.).

NOTE: Higher quality will make the stored files larger.


Refer to page 5-12 for file formats.

Use the procedure below to select the default file quality setting.

1 Press the System Menu key.

2 Press [Common Settings], [ ] and [Next] of Function Defaults. Press [ ] twice and then [Change] of PDF/
TIFF/JPEG Image.

3 Select the default image quality from [1] (Low Quality) to [5] (High Quality).

4 Press [OK].

High Comp. PDF Image

Select the default quality setting for high compressed PDF files.

The table below shows the available settings.

Item Description

Compression Ratio Priority Compression Ratio is given priority with smaller file size.

Standard Standard quality

Quality Priority Image quality is given priority with larger file size.

Use the procedure below to select the default quality setting for highly compressed PDF files.

1 Press the System Menu key.

2 Press [Common Settings], [ ] and [Next] of Function Defaults. Press [ ] twice and [Change] of High
Comp. PDF Image.

3 Select the default for [Compression Ratio Priority], [Standard], or [Quality Priority].

4 Press [OK].

Color TIFF Compression Settings

Select the compression method for TIFF images handled on this machine. Use the procedure below to set the
default Color TIFF Compression setting.

1 Press the System Menu key.

2 Press [Common Settings], [ ] and [Next] of Function Defaults. Press [ ] twice and then [Change] of Color
TIFF Compression.

3 Select [TIFF V6] or [TTN2].

4 Press [OK].

8-22
Default Setting (System Menu)

Repeat Copying

Select the Repeat Copy default. The options are as follows. The table below shows the available settings.

Item Description

Off No Repeat Copy is performed.

On Repeat Copy is performed.

NOTE: This setting is not displayed when the optional Data Security Kit is installed or the Repeat Copy job is
set to 0.
Refer to page 4-36 for Repeat Copy.

Use the procedure below to set the default Repeat Copy setting.

1 Press the System Menu key.

2 Press [Common Settings], [ ] and [Next] of Function Defaults. Press [ ] twice and [Change] of Repeat
Copy.

3 Select the default for [Off] or [On].

4 Press [OK].
8
Collate/Offset

Set the defaults for Collate/Offset. The table below shows the available settings.

Item Description

Collate Off Collate not performed.


On Collate performed.
Offset Off Offset not performed.
Each Set Offset performed. (If [Off] is selected of Collate, it is
(Each Page) performed [Each Page].)

NOTE: Refer to page 3-13 for Collate/Offset.

Use the procedure below to set the default Collate/Offset settings.

1 Press the System Menu key.

2 Press [Common Settings], [ ], [Next] of Function Defaults. Press [ ] twice and [Change] of Collate/Offset.

3 Select the defaults for Collate and Offset respectively.

4 Press [OK].

8-23
Default Setting (System Menu)

JPEG/TIFF Print

Select the image size (resolution) when printing JPEG or TIFF file. The table below shows the available settings.

Item Description

Fit to Paper Size Fit the image size to the selected paper size.
Image Resolution Print at resolution of the actual image.
Fit to Print Resolution Fit the image size to the print resolution.

Use the procedure below to set the default JPEG/TIFF Print settings.

1 Press the System Menu key.

2 Press [Common Settings], [ ], [Next] of Function Defaults. Press [ ] twice and [Change] of JPEG/TIFF
Print.

3 Select the default for [Fit to Paper Size], [Image Resolution], or [Fit to Print Resolution].

4 Press [OK].

XPS Fit to Page

Reduces or enlarges the image size to fit to the selected paper size when printing XPS file.

Use the procedure below to set the default XPS Fit to Page settings.

1 Press the System Menu key.

2 Press [Common Settings], [ ], [Next] of Function Defaults. Press [ ] twice and [Change] of XPS Fit to
Page.

3 Select [Off] or [On] for the default.

4 Press [OK].

8-24
Default Setting (System Menu)

Copy Settings
The following settings are available for copying functions.

• Paper Selection …8-25


• Auto Paper Selection …8-25
• Auto % Priority …8-26
• Reserve Next Priority …8-26
• Preset Limit …8-27
• Quick Setup Registration …8-27

NOTE: If user login administration is enabled, you can only change the settings by logging in with
administrator privileges.

Paper Selection
Set the default paper selection. The table below shows the available settings.

Item Description

Auto Automatically select the cassette containing paper in the same size as
8
originals.

Default Paper Source Select paper source set by Default Paper Source (refer to page 8-9).

Use the procedure below to set the default paper selection.

1 Press the System Menu key.

2 Press [Copy] and [Change] of Paper Selection.

3 Press [Auto] or [Default Paper Source].

4 Press [OK].

5 Move to the copy screen and press the Reset key.

Auto Paper Selection


If [Auto] is selected for Paper Selection, set the paper size selection method when the zoom changes. The table
below shows the available settings.

Item Description

Most Suitable Size Select paper based on the current zoom and the size of the original.

Same as Original Size Select paper that matches the size of the original, regardless the zoom.

8-25
Default Setting (System Menu)

Use the procedure below to specify the action performed for Auto Paper Selection.

1 Press the System Menu key.

2 Press [Copy] and [Change] of Auto Paper Selection.

3 Press [Most Suitable Size] or [Same as Original Size].

4 Press [OK].

5 Move to the copy screen and press the Reset key.

Auto % Priority
When a paper source of different size from the original is selected, select whether automatic zoom (reduce/
zoom) is performed. The table below shows the available settings.

Item Description

Off No zoom performed (copied in original size).

On Automatic zoom performed as appropriate.

Use the procedure below to specify the automatic zoom priority.

1 Press the System Menu key.

2 Press [Copy] and [Change] of Auto % Priority.

3 Select the default for [Off] or [On].

4 Press [OK].

5 Move to the copy screen and press the Reset key.

Reserve Next Priority


Select the operation of the reserve copy and interrupt copy functions and for canceling jobs.
Use the procedure below to select the default Reserve Next Priority setting.

1 Press the System Menu key.

2 Press [Copy] and [Change] of Reserve Next Priority.

3 Select the default for [Off] or [On].

4 Press [OK].

8-26
Default Setting (System Menu)

Preset Limit
Restrict the number of copies that can be made at one time. Options are 1-999 copies.

Use the procedure below to set the limit on the number of copies.

1 Press the System Menu key.

2 Press [Copy] and [Change] of Preset Limit.

3 Press [+] or [–] or use the numeric keys to enter the limit for the number of copies.

4 Press [OK].

Quick Setup Registration


Select the copying functions to be registered for Quick Setup. Six keys of the Quick Setup screen are allocated
to typical functions but can be changed as necessary. Six items from the following options are available.

Paper Selection, Zoom, Staple, Density, Duplex, Combine, Collate/Offset, Original Image,

Original Size, Original Orientation, Continuous Scan

NOTE: Refer to Quick Setup Screen on page 3-41 for the Quick Setup steps.
8
Use the procedure below to register the Quick Setup functions.

1 Press the System Menu key.

2 Press [Copy] and [Next] of Quick Setup Registration.

3 Press [Change] of the function to be registered in Quick Setup.

4 Select a key (1-6) allocated on the Quick Setup Registration screen. Press [Off] to delete a key from the
Quick Setup.

5 Press [OK]. If you overwrite the setting, a confirmation screen appears. Press [Yes].

8-27
Default Setting (System Menu)

Sending Settings
The sending settings allow you to specify the following sending function options.

• Quick Setup Registration …8-28


• Destination Check before Send …8-29
• Color Type …8-29
• Entry Check for New Destination …8-30
• Setting the Default Send Screen …8-30

NOTE: If user login administration is enabled, you can only change the settings by logging in with
administrator privileges.

Quick Setup Registration


Select the sending functions to be registered for Quick Setup. Six keys of the Quick Setup screen are allocated
to typical functions but can be changed as necessary.

Six items in the following options are available.

Original Size, 2-sided/Book Original, Sending Size, Original Orientation, File Format, Density,

Original Image, Scan Resolution, FAX TX Resolution, Color Selection, Zoom, Continuous Scan

Use the procedure below to register the Quick Setup functions.

1 Press the System Menu key.

2 Press [Send] and [Next] of Quick Setup Registration.

3 Press [Change] of the function to be registered in Quick Setup.

4 Select a key (1-6) allocated on the Quick Setup Registration screen. Press [Off] to delete a key from the
Quick Setup.

5 Press [OK]. If you overwrite the setting, a confirmation screen appears. Press [Yes].

8-28
Default Setting (System Menu)

Destination Check before Send


When performing sending jobs, display the confirmation screen of destinations after pressing the Start key.
The table below shows the available settings.

Item Description

Off Do not display the confirmation screen of destinations.

On Display the confirmation screen of destinations.

NOTE: Refer to Confirmation Screen of Destinations on page 3-27 for the Quick Setup steps.

Use the procedure below to set the destination check before send.

1 Press the System Menu key.

2 Press [Send] and then [Change] of Dest. Check before Send.

3 Select [Off] or [On].

4 Press [OK].

Color Type 8
Set the color type when you send color documents. The table below shows the available settings.

Item Description

RGB Send color documents in RGB.

sRGB Allows you to match the color space for machines that support sRGB.

Selecting RGB displays the color profile values set on the machine.

Use the procedure below to set the color type.

1 Press the System Menu key.

2 Press [Send] and then [Change] of Color Type.

3 Select [RGB] or [sRGB].

4 Press [OK].

8-29
Default Setting (System Menu)

Entry Check for New Destination


When adding new destination, display the entry check screen to check the entered destination. The table below
shows the available settings.

Item Description

Off Do not display the entry check screen.

On Display the entry check screen.

Use the procedure below to set the destination check before send.

1 Press the System Menu key.

2 Press [Send] and then [Change] of Entry Check for New Dest.

3 Select [Off] or [On].

4 Press [OK].

Setting the Default Send Screen


Use this procedure to set the default screen displayed when you press the Send key.

The table below shows the available settings.

Item Detail

Destination Displays the destination screen when the Send key is pressed
(screen for sending).

Address Book Displays the address book when the Send key is pressed

Use the procedure below to set the default send screen.

1 Press the System Menu key.

2 Press [Send] and then [Change] of Default Screen.

3 Press [Destination] or [Address Book].

4 Press [OK].

8-30
Default Setting (System Menu)

Document Box Settings


The following settings are available for Document Box.

• Registering / Editing Box …8-31


• Default Setting …8-31
• Job Box …8-31
• Quick Setup Registration …8-31

Registering / Editing Box


Creates a new box, edits a box, or checks details of a box in the custom box, or deletes a box from the custom
box. For details, refer to Using a Custom Box on page 6-2.

Default Setting
Sets the time at which documents in the custom box are automatically deleted.
For details, refer to Setting the document deletion time on page 6-3.

Job Box
The following three operations can be done. For details, refer to each page shown below. 8
• Quick Copy/Proof and Hold Print Box (page 6-13)
• Repeat Copy Box (page 6-15)
• Deleting a Form Stored (page 6-18)

Quick Setup Registration


Select the Storing in Box, Sending from Box, Printing from Box functions to be registered for Quick Setup. Six
keys of the Quick Setup screen are allocated to typical functions but can be changed as necessary.

The options are as follows.

Store File Quick Setup

Color Selection, Storing Size, Density, 2-sided/Book Original, Resolution, Zoom,

Original Orientation, Original Size, Original Image, Continuous Scan

Print Quick Setup

Paper Selection, Collate/Offset, Staple, Duplex, Combine, Delete after Printed

Send Quick Setup

Sending Size, FAX TX Resolution, File Format, Delete after Transmitted

8-31
Default Setting (System Menu)

Use the procedure below to register the Quick Setup functions.

1 Press the System Menu key.

2 Press [Document Box/Removable Memory] and [Next] of Quick Setup Registration.

3 Press [Next] of Store File, Print, or Send.

4 Press [Change] of the function to be registered in Quick Setup.

5 Select a key (1-6) allocated on the Quick Setup screen. Press [Off] to delete a key from the Quick Setup.

6 Press [OK]. If you overwrite the setting, a confirmation screen appears. Press [Yes].

8-32
Default Setting (System Menu)

Printer Settings
Printing from computers, settings are generally made on the application software screen. However, the following
settings are available for configuring the defaults to customize the machine.

• Emulation …8-33
• EcoPrint …8-34
• Override A4/Letter …8-34
• Duplex …8-35
• Copies …8-35
• Orientation …8-35
• Form Feed Timeout …8-36
• LF Action …8-36
• CR Action …8-37
• Paper Feed Mode …8-37

NOTE: If user login administration is enabled, you can only change the settings by logging in with
administrator privileges.

8
Emulation
Select the emulation for operating this machine by commands oriented to other types of printers.

Selection of emulation

The printer can emulate PCL 6, KPDL and KPDL(Auto).

Use the procedure below to select the emulation.

1 Press the System Menu Key.

2 Press [Printer] > [Change] of Emulation.

3 Select the desired emulation.

NOTE: If you selected [KPDL(Auto)], set Alternative Emulation, too. (Refer to page 8-33)
When you have selected [KPDL] or [KPDL(Auto)], set KPDL Error Report, too. (Refer to page 8-34)

4 Press [OK].

Setting of Alternative Emulation

When you have selected [KPDL(Auto)] as emulation mode, you can switch between KPDL and another
emulation mode (alternative emulation) automatically according to the data to print. The alternative emulation
you can set is [PCL6].

Use the procedure below to select the alternative emulation.

1 Press the System Menu Key.

8-33
Default Setting (System Menu)

2 Press [Printer] > [Change] of Emulation > [KPDL(Auto)] > [Alt Emulation].

3 Select the desired alternative emulation and then press [OK].

4 Press [OK].

Setting of KPDL error report

When an error has occurred during printing in KPDL emulation mode, set whether or not the error report is
output. The default setting is Off (not output).

Use the procedure below to specify the KPDL error report setting.

1 Press the System Menu Key.

2 Press [Printer] > [Change] of Emulation > [KPDL] or [KPDL(Auto)] > [KPDL Error Report].

3 Press [On] or [Off] and then press [OK].

4 Press [OK].

EcoPrint
EcoPrint conserves toner when printing. This is recommended for test copies where faded printing is not a
problem.

Use the procedure below to specify the EcoPrint setting.

1 Press the System Menu key.

2 Press [Printer] and [Change] of EcoPrint.

3 Press [Off] or [On].

4 Press [OK].

Override A4/Letter
Select whether to treat A4 size and Letter, which are similar in size, as the same size when printing. The table
below shows the available settings.

Item Description

On A4 and Letter are regarded as the same in size. The machine will
use whichever size is in the paper source.

Off A4 and Letter are not regarded as the same in size.

Use the procedure below to specify the override A4/Letter setting.

1 Press the System Menu key.

2 Press [Printer] and [Change] of Override A4/Letter.

3 Press [Off] or [On].

4 Press [OK].

8-34
Default Setting (System Menu)

Duplex
Select binding orientation for duplex mode. The table below shows the available settings.

Item Description Finish

1-sided No duplex mode

2-sided Bind Shorter edge bound


ShortEdge

2-sided Bind Longer edge bound


LongEdge

Use the procedure below to select a duplex setting.

1 Press the System Menu key.

2 Press [Printer] and [Change] of Duplex.

3 Press [1-sided], [2-sided Bind LongEdge], or [2-sided Bind ShortEdge]. 8


4 Press [OK].

Copies
Set the default number of copies, from 1 to 999.

Use the procedure below to specify the default number of copies.

1 Press the System Menu key.

2 Press [Printer] and [Change] of Copies.

3 Press [+],[–] or the numeric keys to set the default number of copies.

4 Press [OK].

Orientation
Set the default orientation, Portrait or Landscape.
Portrait Landscape
Printer Printer

Use the procedure below to set the default orientation for printing.

8-35
Default Setting (System Menu)

1 Press the System Menu key.

2 Press [Printer] and [Change] of Orientation.

3 Press [Portrait] or [Landscape].

4 Press [OK].

Form Feed Timeout


Receiving print data from the computer, the machine may sometimes wait if there is no information signaling
that the last page does not have any more data to be printed. When the preset timeout passes, the machine
automatically prints paper. The options are between 5 and 495 seconds.

Use the procedure below to set the form feed timeout.

1 Press the System Menu key.

2 Press [Printer], [ ] and [Change] of Form Feed Timeout.

3 Press [+] or [–] to set the Form Feed Timeout.

You can set the timeout delay in seconds.

You cannot use the numeric keys to enter this value.

4 Press [OK].

LF Action
Set the line feed action when the machine receives the line feed code (character code 0AH). The table below
shows the available settings.

Item Description

LF Only Only line feed performed.

LF and CR Line feed and character return performed.

Ignore LF No line feed performed.

Use the procedure below to specify an LF action.

1 Press the System Menu key.

2 Press [Printer], [ ] and [Change] of LF Action.

3 Press [LF Only], [LF and CR] or [Ignore LF].

4 Press [OK].

8-36
Default Setting (System Menu)

CR Action
Set the character return action when the machine receives the character return code (character code 0DH). The
table below shows the available settings.

Item Description

CR Only Only character return performed.

LF and CR Character return and line feed performed.

Ignore CR No character return performed.

Use the procedure below to specify a CR action.

1 Press the System Menu key.

2 Press [Printer], [ ] and [Change] of CR Action.

3 Press [CR Only], [LF and CR] or [Ignore CR].

4 Press [OK].

Paper Feed Mode


8
While printing from the computer, select how to feed paper when the paper source and type are specified. The
table below shows the available settings.

Item Description

Auto Search the paper source that matches the selected paper size and type.

Fixed Print on paper loaded in the specified paper source.

Use the procedure below to select the paper feed mode.

1 Press the System Menu key.

2 Press [Printer], [ ] and [Change] of Paper Feed Mode.

3 Press [Auto] or [Fixed].

4 Press [OK].

8-37
Default Setting (System Menu)

Printing Reports/Sending Notice


Print reports to check the machine settings and status. Default settings for printing the result reports can also
be configured.

NOTE: If user login administration is enabled, you can only print by logging in with administrator privileges.

Printing Reports
Printable reports are as follows.

Status Page
Check the information including current settings, available memory space, and optional equipment installed.

Status Page
TASKalfa xxxxx
Firmware Version

Font List

Check the font samples installed in the machine.

8-38
Default Setting (System Menu)

Network Status Page

Check the information including network interface firmware version, network address and protocol.

Network Status Page


TASKalfa xxxxx
Firmware Version

Service Status Page

More detailed information is available than on the Status Page. Service personnel usually print the service status
pages for maintenance purpose.

Use the procedure below to print a report.

1 Press the System Menu key.


8
2 Press [Report] and [Next] of Print Report.

3 Press [Print] for the report you want to print. Printing starts.

A confirmation screen appears. Press [Yes].

Send Result Report


Automatically print a report of transmission result when a transmission is complete. The table below shows the
available settings.

Item Description

Off No result report printed.

On Result report automatically printed.


Transmitted images can also be attached to the FAX result report.

Error Only Result report printed only when a transmission ends in an error. If two or more
destinations are registered, the reports are printed only for the destinations with
the errors. Transmitted images can also be attached to the FAX result report.

1 Press the System Menu key.

2 Press [Report], [Next] of Result Report Setting, [Next] of Send Result Report and then [Change] of E-mail/
Folder.

3 Press [Off], [On], or [Error Only].

4 Press [OK].

8-39
Default Setting (System Menu)

Report for Job Canceled before Sending


Print a send result report when the job is canceled before being sent.

1 Press the System Menu key.

2 Press [Report], [Next] of Result Report Setting, [Next] of Send Result Report and then [Change] of
Canceled before Sending.

3 Press [Off], [On].

4 Press [OK].

8-40
Default Setting (System Menu)

Adjustment/Maintenance
Adjust printing quality and conduct machine maintenance.

• Copy Density Adjustment …8-41


• Send/Box Density Adjust …8-41
• Print Density …8-42
• Drum Refresh …8-42
• Auto Drum Refresh …8-42
• Correcting Fine Black Lines …8-43
• System Initialization …8-44
• Display Brightness …8-44
• Silent Mode …8-44
• Auto Color Correction...8-44
• Gray Adjustment...8-45

NOTE: If user login administration is enabled, you can only change the settings by logging in with
administrator privileges.

8
Copy Density Adjustment
Adjust copy density. Adjustment can be made in 7 levels both in auto and manual density modes.

Use the procedure below to adjust the copy density.

1 Press the System Menu key.

2 Press [ ], [Adjustment/Maintenance] and then [Next] of Copy Density Adjustment.

3 Press [Change] of Auto or of Manual.

4 Press [-3] - [+3] (Lighter-Darker) to adjust density.

5 Press [OK].

Send/Box Density Adjust


Adjust scan density when sending or storing the data in Document Box. Adjustment can be made in 7 levels
both in auto and manual density modes.

Use the procedure below to adjust the density.

1 Press the System Menu key.

2 Press [ ], [Adjustment/Maintenance] and then [Next] of Send/Box Density Adjust..

3 Press [Change] of Auto or of Manual.

4 Press [-3] - [+3] (Lighter-Darker) to adjust density.

5 Press [OK].

8-41
Default Setting (System Menu)

Print Density
Adjust print density. Adjustment can be made in 5 levels.

Use the procedure below to adjust the print density.

1 Press the System Menu key.

2 Press [ ], [Adjustment/Maintenance] and then [Change] of Print Density.

3 Press [1] - [5] (Lighter-Darker) to adjust density.

4 Press [OK].

Drum Refresh
Refresh the drum when image blur or white spots appear on images in copies.

There are 2 drum refresh modes.

Item Description

Drum Refresh 1 Use this mode when images are blurred or smeared.
Refreshing takes about 160 seconds.

Drum Refresh 2 Use this mode when white spots appear on images.
Refreshing takes about 90 seconds.

NOTE: Drum Refresh cannot be performed while printing. Execute Drum Refresh after the printing is done.

When you run [Drum Refresh 2], the machine makes a vibrating sound for about 90 seconds until drum
refreshing is completed. The toner soiling on the ejected paper is normal and does not indicate a fault.

To use [Drum Refresh 2], load Ledger or A3 size paper into the Multi Purpose tray.

Use the procedure below to refresh the drum.

1 Press the System Menu key.

2 Press [ ], [Adjustment/Maintenance].

3 Press [ ] and then [Next] of Drum Refresh 1 or Drum Refresh 2.

4 Press [Execute] to perform Drum Refresh.

5 After Drum Refresh is completed, press [OK] to return to the Adjustment/Maintenance screen.

Auto Drum Refresh


Auto Drum Refresh may be executed when the machine is turned on the power or recovered from the low power
mode or sleep mode. Auto Drum Refresh is executed automatically to keep the best image quality by monitoring
its peripheral temperature and humidity.

8-42
Default Setting (System Menu)

Set the duration of time to execute Auto Drum Refresh. The table below shows the available settings.

Item Description

Off Do not perform Drum Refresh.

Standard Perform Auto Drum Refresh as Standard (maximum 120 seconds).

Long Perform Auto Drum Refresh as Long (maximum 160 seconds).

NOTE: You can also execute Drum refresh as needed (Refer to Drum Refresh on page 8-42.)

Use the procedure below to specify the setting for Auto Drum Refresh.

1 Press the System Menu key.

2 Press [ ], [Adjustment/Maintenance], [ ] and then [Change] of Auto Drum Refresh.

3 Select [Off], [Standard] or [Long].

4 Press [OK].

Correcting Fine Black Lines


8
Correct fine black lines (black streaks caused by contamination), which may appear on the copies, when the
optional document processor used.

Paper feed
direction

The table below shows the available settings.

Item Description

Off No correction performed.

On(Low) Correction performed. The reproduction of the image becomes lower when
using Off.

On(High) Correction performed. Select this item if black streak remains after using On
(Low). The reproduction of the image becomes lower when using On (Low).

NOTE: Using Correcting Fine Black Line can impair reproduction of fine characters. It is recommended to
keep the default ([Off]).

8-43
Default Setting (System Menu)

Use the procedure below to specify the setting for correcting fine black lines.

1 Press the System Menu key.

2 Press [ ], [Adjustment/Maintenance] and then [Change] of Correcting Black Line.

3 Press [Off], [On(Low)] or [On(High)].

4 Press [OK].

System Initialization
Initialize the hard disk mounted on the machine to return to the default mode.

Refer to System Initialization on page 8-63 about the initialization procedures.

Display Brightness
Set the brightness of the touch panel.

Use the procedure below to adjust the display brightness.

1 Press the System Menu key.


2 Press [ ], [Adjustment/Maintenance] and then [Change] of Display Brightness.
3 Press [1] - [4] (Darker- Lighter) to adjust brightness.
4 Press [OK].

Silent Mode
Make the machine run more quietly. Select this mode when the running noise is uncomfortable.

Use the procedure below to set Silent mode.

1 Press the System Menu key.


2 Press [ ], [Adjustment/Maintenance] and then [Change] of Silent Mode.
3 Press [Off] or [On].
4 Press [OK].

Auto Color Correction


This setting allows you to adjust the detection level used by the machine to determine whether the original is
color or black and white during Auto Color Mode. Setting a lower value will result in more originals being
identified as color, while a larger value will tend to increase the number of originals being identified as black and
white.

Use the procedure below to set the Auto Color Detection Level.

1 Press the System Menu key.


2 Press [ ], [Adjustment/Maintenance], [ ] and then [Change] of Auto Color Correction.
3 Press one of keys [1] to [5] (Color - B & W) to set the detection level.
4 Press [OK].

8-44
Default Setting (System Menu)

Gray Adjustment
After prolonged use, or from the effects of surrounding temperature or humidity, the hue of printed color output
may shift or color drift may occur. Use this function to correct color settings when the color of a finished copy
does not match the original.

NOTE: To perform gray adjustment, verify that either 11 × 8 1/2" or A4 paper is loaded into a cassette.

Use the procedure below for adjustment.

1 Press the System Menu key.

2 Press [ ], [Adjustment/Maintenance], [ ] and


then [Next] of Gray Adjustment.

3 Press [Execute]. A color pattern is printed.

4 As shown in the illustration, place the printed side


down on the platen with the three black boxes
aligned to the top.

5 Press [Execute]. The color pattern is read and


adjustment begins.
8

6 Press [OK] in the adjustment end confirmation


screen.

8-45
Default Setting (System Menu)

Date/Timer
Date/Timer settings include:

• Date/Time …8-46
• Date Format …8-46
• Time Zone …8-47
• Auto Panel Reset …8-47
• Auto Sleep …8-48
• Auto Error Clear …8-49
• Interrupt Clear Timer …8-50

NOTE: If user login administration is enabled, you can only change the settings by logging in with
administrator privileges.

Date/Time
Set the date and time for the location where you use the machine. If you perform Send as E-mail, the date and
time set here will be displayed on the header.

CAUTION: Be sure to set Time Zone before the Date/Time setup.

Use the procedure below to set the date and time.

1 Press the System Menu key.

2 Press [ ], [Date/Timer] and then [Change] of Date/Time.

3 Press [+] or [–] to enter the date and time respectively.

4 Press [OK].

NOTE: If you try to change the date/time when a trial application (page 8-75) is running, the If you change
Date/Time setting, trial functions will be unavailable. Are you sure? message is displayed. To change the date/
time, press [Yes].

Date Format
Select the display format of year, month, and date. The year is displayed in Western notation.

Use the procedure below to select the date format.

1 Press the System Menu key.

2 Press [ ], [Date/Timer] and then [Change] of Date Format.

3 Select [MM/DD/YYYY], [DD/MM/YYYY], or [YYYY/MM/DD] and press [OK].

8-46
Default Setting (System Menu)

Time Zone
Set the time difference in the location you are from GMT.

Use the procedure below to set the time difference.

1 Press the System Menu key.

2 Press [ ], [Date/Timer] and then [Change] of Time Zone.

3 Select the location.

NOTE: Press [ ] or [ ] to select the location.

4 Press [Off] or [On] of Summer Time and press [OK].

NOTE: If you select a region that does not utilize summer time, the summer time setting screen will not appear.

Auto Panel Reset


If no jobs are run for a certain period of time, automatically reset settings and return to the default setting.
8
NOTE: Refer to page 8-14 for the default settings.

Auto Panel Reset ON/OFF

Select to use Auto Panel Reset or not.

Use the procedure below to specify the auto panel reset setting.

1 Press the System Menu key.

2 Press [ ], [Date/Timer] and then [Change] of Auto Panel Reset.

3 Press [Off] or [On].

4 Press [OK].

8-47
Default Setting (System Menu)

Panel Reset Timer

If you select [On] for Auto Panel Reset, set the amount of time to wait before Auto Panel Reset. Options are
between 5 and 495 seconds (every five seconds).

NOTE: If you select [Off] for Auto Panel Reset, the time display does not appear.

Use the procedure below to set the reset time.

1 Press the System Menu key.

2 Press [ ], [Date/Timer] and then [Change] of Panel Reset Timer.

3 Press [+] or [–] to enter the time until Auto Panel Reset is turned on.

You cannot use the numeric keys to enter this value.

4 Press [OK].

Low Power Timer


You can specify the amount of time to wait before Low Power Mode.
Specify a value from 1 - 240 minutes (1 minute increments).
For more information on Low Power Mode, refer to the Low Power Mode and Auto Low Power Mode on page 2-9.

Use the procedure below to set the Low Power Mode.

1 Press the System Menu key.

2 Press [ ], [Date/Timer] and then [Low Power Timer].

3 Press [+],[–] or the numeric keys to enter the time until Low Power Mode is turned on.

4 Press [OK].

Auto Sleep
If no job runs for a certain period of time, automatically enter Sleep Mode. Refer to Sleep and Auto Sleep on
page 2-10 for Sleep.

Auto Sleep ON/OFF

Select whether to use Auto Sleep or not.

NOTE: Time remaining before Auto Sleep can be modified as necessary.

Use the procedure below to specify the auto sleep setting.

1 Press the System Menu key.

2 Press [ ], [Date/Timer] and then [Change] of Auto Sleep.

3 Press [Off] or [On].

4 Press [OK].

8-48
Default Setting (System Menu)

Sleep Timer

Set the amount of time to wait before Auto Sleep. Options are between 1 and 240 minutes (every one minute).

NOTE: If you select [Off] for Auto Sleep, the time display does not appear.

Use the procedure below to set the Auto Sleep time.

1 Press the System Menu key.

2 Press [ ], [Date/Timer] and then [Change] of Sleep Timer.

3 Press [+] and [–] or the numeric keys to enter the time until Auto Sleep is turned on.

4 Press [OK].

Auto Error Clear


If an error occurs during printing, the print job stops to wait for the next step to be taken by the user. In the Auto
Error Clear mode, automatically clear the error after a set amount of time elapses.

The following errors are automatically cleared.

Print overrun 8
Memory is full

Auto Error Clear ON/OFF

Select whether to use Auto Error Clear or not.

Use the procedure below to specify the auto error clear setting.

1 Press the System Menu key.

2 Press [ ], [Date/Timer] and then [Change] of Auto Error Clear.

3 Press [Off] or [On].

4 Press [OK].

8-49
Default Setting (System Menu)

Error Clear Timer

If you select [On] for Auto Error Clear, set the amount of time to wait before automatically clearing errors. Options
are between 5 and 495 seconds (every five seconds).

NOTE: If you select [Off] for Auto Error Clear, the time display does not appear.

Use the procedure below to set the automatic error clear delay.

1 Press the System Menu key.

2 Press [ ], [Date/Timer], [ ] and then [Change] of Error Clear Timer.

3 Press [+] or [–] to enter the time until printing restarts.

You cannot use the numeric keys to enter this value.

4 Press [OK].

Interrupt Clear Timer


Set the period after which the machine reverts to Normal mode when it has been set to Interrupt Copy mode
and then left unused. Any period between 5 and 495 seconds (in five-second increments) can be set.

The procedure for setting the interrupt clear timer is explained below.

1 Press the System Menu key.

2 Press [ ], [Date/Timer], [ ] and then [Change] of Interrupt Clear Timer.

3 Press [+] or [-] to enter the time for the interrupt clear timer.

4 Press [OK].

8-50
Default Setting (System Menu)

Editing Destination (Address Book/Adding One Touch Keys)


Save frequently used destinations to Address Book or One Touch Keys. The saved destinations can be
changed. The destinations are available for Send as E-mail, Send to Folder, and Fax Transmission (optional).

Adding a Destination
Add a new destination to the Address Book. There are two registering methods, contacts and groups. When
adding a group, enter the group name and select group members from the Address Book.

NOTE: If user login administration is enabled, you can only edit destinations in the Address Book by logging in
with administrator privileges.

Adding a contact

A maximum of 1,000 contact addresses can be registered. Each address can include the information such as
destination name, E-mail address, FTP server folder path, computer folder path, and FAX No. (optional).

Use the procedure below to register a new individual contact.

1 Press the System Menu key.

2 Press [Edit Destination], [Register/Edit] of Address Book, [Add], [Contact] and then [Next].
8
3 To specify the address number, press [Change] in Address Number.

4 Press [+],[–] or numeric keys to enter a particular Address Number (1-2500).

To have the number assigned automatically, enter “0000”.

NOTE: Address Number is an ID for a destination. You can select any available number out of 2,500 numbers
for contacts and 500 numbers for groups.
If you specify an address number that is already in use, an error message appears when you press [Register]
and the number cannot be registered. If you set “0000” as the address number, the address is registered under
the lowest available number.

5 Press [OK]. The screen shown in step 3 reappears.

6 Press [Change] of Name.

7 Enter the destination name (up to 32 characters) to be displayed on the Address Book and press [OK]. The
screen shown in step 3 reappears.

NOTE: Refer to the Character Entry Method on page Appendix-10 for details on entering characters.

8 Press [E-mail] to add an e-mail address, [SMB] to add a folder on the computer, or [FTP] to add an FTP
folder.

The procedure differs depending on the transmission method selected.

8-51
Default Setting (System Menu)

E-mail Address

Press [Change] of E-mail Address, enter the E-mail address and press [OK].The table below explains the
items to be entered.

NOTE: Refer to the Character Entry Method on page Appendix-10 for details on entering characters.

The Folder (FTP) Address

Press [Change] of Host Name, Path, Login User Name and Login Password, enter the information for each
item and press [OK].

The table below explains the items to be entered.

Max. No. of
Item Description
Characters

Host Name* FTP server host name or IP address 64 chars

Path Path for the file to be stored (e.g., "\User\ScanData") 128 chars
If no path is entered, the file is stored in the home directory.

Login User Name User name FTP server login 64 chars

Login Password Password for FTP server login 64 chars

* If you specify a port number other than the default (21), use the "Host name: port number" format.
(e.g., FTPhostname:140)
To enter the IPv6 address, enclose the address in brackets [ ].
(e.g., [3ae3:9a0:cd05:b1d2:28a:1fc0:a1:10ae]:140)

NOTE: Refer to the Character Entry Method on page Appendix-10 for details on entering characters.
Press [Connection Test] to check the connection to the FTP server you chose. If the connection fails, check the
entries you made.

8-52
Default Setting (System Menu)

The Folder (SMB) Address

Press [Change] of Host Name, Path, Login User Name and Login Password, enter the information for each
item and press [OK].

The table below explains the items to be entered.

Max. No. of
Item Description
Characters

Host Name* Host name or IP address of the sending computer 64 chars

Path Path to the folder used to save files (e.g., “\User\ScanData”) 128 chars

Login User Name User name for folder access 64 chars


For example, abcdnet\james.smith

Login Password Password for folder access 64 chars

* If you specify a port number other than the default (139), use the “Host name: port number” format.
(e.g., SMBhostname:140)
To enter the IPv6 address, enclose the address in brackets [ ].
(e.g., [3ae3:9a0:cd05:b1d2:28a:1fc0:a1:10ae]:140)

NOTE: Refer to the Character Entry Method on page Appendix-10 for details on entering characters. 8
Press [Connection Test] to check the connection to the computer you chose. If the connection fails, check the
entries you made.

9 Check if the destination entry is correct and press [Register]. The destination is added to the Address Book.

Adding a Group

Compile two or more contacts into a group. Designations in the group can be added at the same time. When
adding a group, a maximum of 500 groups can be added in the Address Book.

NOTE: Before adding a group in the Address Book, the contacts to be included in the group must be added
first. Up to 100 destinations for the e-mail, 500 destinations for the FAX, and the total of 10 destinations for the
FTP and SMB can be registered per a group.

Use the procedure below to register a group.

1 Press the System Menu key.

2 Press [Edit Destination], [Register/Edit] of Address Book, [Add], [Group] and then [Next].

3 To specify the address number, press [Change] in Address Number.

8-53
Default Setting (System Menu)

4 Use [+]/[-] or the numeric keys to enter an address number (1 to 2500).

To have the number assigned automatically, set "0000".

NOTE: Address Number is an ID for a group. You can select any available number out of 2,000 numbers for
contacts and 500 numbers for groups.
If you specify an address number that is already in use, an error message appears when you press [Register]
and the number cannot be registered. If you set "0000" as the address number, the address is registered under
the lowest available number.

5 Press [OK]. The Add Group screen reappears.

6 Press [Change] of Name.

7 Enter the group name displayed on the Address Book not more than 32 characters.

NOTE: Refer to the Character Entry Method on page Appendix-10 for details on entering characters.

8 Press [Member].

9 Press [Add].

10 Select destinations (contacts) to add to the group.

NOTE: Destinations can be sorted or searched by destination name or address number. Refer to
Specifying Destination on page 3-28 for Address List.

11 Press [OK].
If you have more destinations to add, repeat Steps 9 to 11.

12 Check if the selected destination was added to the group and press [Register]. Now the group is added to
the Address Book.

Editing a Destination
Edit/delete the destinations (Contacts) you added to the Address Book.

Use the procedure below to edit a destination.

1 Press the System Menu key.

2 Press [Edit Destination] and then [Register/Edit] of Address Book.

3 Select a destination or group to edit.

NOTE: Destinations can be sorted or searched by destination name or address number. Refer to Specifying
Destination on page 3-28 for Address List.

4 Press [Detail].

The procedure differs depending on the details to be edited.

8-54
Default Setting (System Menu)

Editing a Contact
1 Change Address Number, Name and destination type and address. Refer to Adding a contact on page
8-51 for the details.
2 After you have completed the changes, press [Register].
3 Press [Yes] in the change confirmation screen to register the changed destination.

Editing a Group
1 Change Address Number and Name. Refer to Adding a Group on page 8-53 for the details.
2 Press [Member].
3 To delete any destination from the group, select the destination and press [Delete]. Press [Yes] on the
screen to confirm the deletion.
4 After you have completed the changes, press [Register].
5 Press [Yes] in the change confirmation screen to register the changed group.

Deleting a Contact or Group

Repeat Steps 1 to 3, press [Delete]. Press [Yes] on the screen to confirm the deletion. Deletion is performed.

Adding a Destination on One Touch Key


8
Add a new destination (contact or group). A maximum of 1000 destinations can be registered.

NOTE: Refer to Specifying Destination on page 3-28 for use of One Touch Key.

Use the procedure below to register a new destination under a One Touch key.

1 Press the System Menu key.

2 Press [Edit Destination] and [Register/Edit] of One Touch Key.

3 Select a One Touch Key number (0001 to 1000) for the destination. Pressing Quick No. Search key or [No.]
enables direct entry of a One Touch Key number.

Select a One Touch Key with no registered destination.

4 Press [Register/Edit]. The address book appears.

5 Select a destination (contact or group) to add to the One Touch Key number.

Pressing [Detail] shows the detailed information of the selected destination.

NOTE: Destinations can be sorted or searched by destination name or address number. Refer to Specifying
Destination on page 3-28 for Address List.

6 Press [OK]. The destination will be added to the One Touch Key.

8-55
Default Setting (System Menu)

Editing One Touch Key

Edit/delete the destinations you added to One Touch Key.

Use the procedure below to edit the One Touch key.

1 Press the System Menu key.

2 Press [Edit Destination] and then [Register/Edit] of One Touch Key.

3 Select a One Touch Key number (0001 to 1000) for the destination. Pressing Quick No. Search key or [No.]
enables direct entry of a One Touch Key number.

The procedure differs depending on the details to be edited.

Changing the Registered Information


1 Press [Register/Edit].
2 Select a new destination (Contact or group). Pressing [Detail] shows the detailed information of the
selected destination.

NOTE: Destinations can be sorted or searched by destination name or address number. Refer to
Specifying Destination on page 3-28 for Address List.

3 Press [OK].
4 Press [Yes] on the screen to add the destination to the One Touch Key.

Deleting the Registered Information


1 Press [Delete].
2 Press [Yes] on the screen to confirm the deletion of the data registered in the One Touch Key.

8-56
Default Setting (System Menu)

Sort Settings
Select the default sort setting of the address for the address book.

The table below shows the available settings.

Item Detail

No. Displays the destination list in order of the registered number.

Name Displays the destination list in order of the registered name.

Use the procedure below to specify the Sort settings.

1 Press the System Menu key.

2 Press [Edit Destination], [Next] of Address Book Defaults and then [Change] of Sort.

3 Select [No.] or [Name].

4 Press [OK].

Narrow Down Settings


This procedure can be used to filter (narrow down) the types of destination listed when the address book is 8
displayed.

The table below shows the available settings.

Item Detail

Off Displays all destination types in the destination list.

E-mail Displays only e-mail destinations.

Folder Displays only folder (SMB or FTP) destinations.

FAX Displays only FAX destinations.

i-FAX Displays only i-FAX destinations.

Group Displays only groups.

Use the procedure below to specify the Narrow Down settings.

1 Press the System Menu key.

2 Press [Edit Destination], [Next] of Address Book Defaults and then [Change] of Narrow Down.

3 Select the type of destination filter.

4 Press [OK].

8-57
Default Setting (System Menu)

Internet Browser Setup


This procedure sets up the Internet browser application. You can specify the following Internet browser settings.

• Internet Browser Setting


• Browser Preferences
• Proxy Settings

Internet Browser Setting


This selects whether or not the Internet browser is used.

Use the procedure below to specify the Internet browser setting.

1 Press the System Menu key.

2 Press [ ] and then [Internet].

NOTE: If user login administration is disabled, the user authentication screen appears. Enter your login user
name and password and then press [Login]. For this, you need to login with administrator privileges. Refer to
Adding a User on page 11-5 for the default login user name and password.

3 Press [Change] of Internet Browser.

4 Press [On] or [Off].

5 Press [OK].

Browser Preferences
This specifies Internet browser preferences such as your home page setting and how pages are displayed.

NOTE: This is not displayed if you selected Off in Internet Browser Setting (page 8-58).

Use the procedure below to set your Internet browser preferences.

1 Press the System Menu key.

2 Press [ ] and then [Internet].

NOTE: If user login administration is disabled, the user authentication screen appears. Enter your login user
name and password and then press [Login]. For this, you need to login with administrator privileges. Refer to
Adding a User on page 11-5 for the default login user name and password.

3 Press [Next] of Browser Environment.

4 To set your home page, press [Change] of Home Page, press [URL], enter the URL and then press [OK].
Press [OK] again.

NOTE: Refer to the Character Entry Method on page Appendix-10 for details on entering characters.

8-58
Default Setting (System Menu)

5 To set the text size, press [Change] of Text Size, select [Large], [Medium] or [Small] as the text size and
then press [OK].

6 To set the display mode, press [Change] of Display Mode, select [Normal], [Just-Fit Rendering] or [Smart-
Fit Rendering] as the display mode and then press [OK].

7 To specify the settings for accepting cookies, press [Change] of Cookie, select [Accept All], [Reject All] or
[Prompt before Accepting] as your cookie acceptance policy and then press [OK].

Proxy Settings
Use the procedure below to specify the proxy settings.

1 Press the System Menu key.

2 Press [ ] and then [Internet].

NOTE: If user login administration is disabled, the user authentication screen appears. Enter your login user
name and password and then press [Login]. For this, you need to login with administrator privileges. Refer to
Adding a User on page 11-5 for the default login user name and password.

3 Press [Change] of Proxy and then press [On].

 To set a proxy server (HTTP) 8


1 Press [Keyboard] of Proxy Server (HTTP), enter the proxy address and press [OK].
2 Press [# Keys] and enter the port number.

 To set a proxy server (HTTPS)


1 Press [Keyboard] of Proxy Server (HTTPS), enter the proxy address and press [OK].
2 Press [# Keys] and enter the port number.

 To set domains for which no proxy is used


1 Press [Keyboard] of Do Not Use Proxy for Following Domains, enter the domain name and press [OK].

NOTE: Refer to the Character Entry Method on page Appendix-10 for details on entering characters.

4 Press [OK].

8-59
Default Setting (System Menu)

Applications
You can install and use applications that will make your day-to-day use of this machine more efficient.

Installing Applications
You can install new applications.

Use the procedure below to install an application.

1 Insert the USB memory containing the application to be installed into the USB memory slot (A1).

NOTE: If Removable Memory is recognized. Displaying files. appears, press [No].

2 Press the System Menu key.

3 Press [ ] and then [Application].

NOTE: If user login administration is disabled, the user authentication screen appears. Enter your login user
name and password and then press [Login]. For this, you need to login with administrator privileges. Refer to
Adding a User on page 11-5 for the default login user name and password.

4 Press [Add].

5 Select the application to be installed and press [Install].

You can view detailed information on the selected application by pressing [Detail].

6 When the confirmation screen appears, press [Yes].

Installation of the application begins. Depending on the application being installed, the installation may take
some time.

Once the installation ends, the original screen reappears.

7 To install another application, repeat steps 5 to 6.

8 To remove the USB memory, press [Remove Memory] and wait until the Removable Memory can be safely
removed message appears. Then remove the USB memory.

8-60
Default Setting (System Menu)

Activating/Deactivating Application
To use an application, set the application to Activate.

Use the procedure below to start using an application.

1 Press the System Menu key.

2 Press [ ] and then [Application].

NOTE: If user login administration is disabled, the user authentication screen appears. Enter your login user
name and password and then press [Login]. For this, you need to login with administrator privileges. Refer to
Adding a User on page 11-5 for the default login user name and password.

3 Select the desired application and press [Activate].

You can view detailed information on the selected application by pressing [Detail].

NOTE: To exit an application, press [Deactivate].

4 Enter the license key and press [Official].

Some applications do not require you to enter a license key. If the license key entry screen does not appear, 8
go to Step 5.

To use the application as a trial, press [Trial] without entering the license key.

5 When the confirmation screen appears, press [Yes].

IMPORTANT: If you change the date/time while using an application, you will no longer be able to use the
application.

Launching Applications
You can launch any application for which Activate is set.

Use the procedure below to launch an application.

1 Press the Application key.

A list of available applications appears on the touch panel.

2 Press the key for the application to be launched.

The application starts up.

3 To exit the application, press [✕].

4 When the application exit confirmation screen appears, press [Yes].

NOTE: The procedure for exiting some applications may differ.

8-61
Default Setting (System Menu)

Deleting Applications
Use the procedure below to delete an installed application.

IMPORTANT: Always exit the application to be deleted before deleting the application. (Refer to Activating/
Deactivating Application on page 8-61.)

1 Press the System Menu key.

2 Press [ ] and then [Application].

NOTE: If login administration is disabled, the user authentication screen appears. Enter your login user name
and password and then press [Login]. For this, you need to login with administrator privileges. Refer to Adding
a User on page 11-5 for the default login user name and password.

3 Select the application to be deleted and press [Delete].

You can view detailed information on the selected application by pressing [Detail].

4 When the deletion confirmation screen appears, press [Yes]. The application is deleted.

8-62
Default Setting (System Menu)

System Initialization
Initialize the hard disk mounted on the machine to return to the default mode.

CAUTION: System initialization will erase Custom Document Boxes, data stored in Document Box, addresses
in the Address Book, user property, account information, and settings.

NOTE: This item will not be displayed if the optional Data Security Kit is installed. Refer to the Data Security
Kit (E) Operation Guide on the bundled CD-ROM about the functions added when the Data Security Kit is
installed and related procedures.
Using KM-NET VIEWER allows you to back up addresses in the Address Book.

1 Press the System Menu key.

2 Press [ ], [Adjustment/Maintenance] and then [Execute] of System Initialization.

3 If user login administration is disabled, the user authentication screen appears. Enter your login user name
and password and then press [Login]. For this, you need to login with administrator privileges. Refer to
Adding a User on page 11-5 for the default login user name and password.

4 When the confirmation screen appears, press [Yes].

Initialization starts.
8

IMPORTANT: The Formatting... Do not turn off the main power switch. message appears during initialization.
Wait until initialization ends.

5 Once the initialization ends, the message Task is completed. Turn the main power switch off and on.
appears. Turn the main power switch off.

Restarting the System


Restart the CPU without turning the main power switch off. Use this to deal with any unstable operation by the
machine. (Same as the computer restart.)

Use the procedure below to restart the system.

1 Press the System Menu key.

2 Press [System] and [Execute] of Restart.

NOTE: If user login administration is disabled, the user authentication screen appears. Enter a login user
name and password, and press [Login]. For this, you need to login with administrator privileges. Refer to
Adding a User on page 11-5 for the default login user name and password.

3 When the confirmation screen appears, press [Yes]. The system is restarted.

8-63
Default Setting (System Menu)

Network Setup
The following network settings are available.

• Checking Host Name …8-64


• TCP/IP (IPv4) Setup …8-64
• TCP/IP (IPv6) Setup …8-64
• Protocol Detail …8-66
• NetWare Setup …8-67
• AppleTalk Setup …8-68
• WSD Scan Setup …8-68
• WSD Print Setup …8-68
• Secure Protocol …8-69
• IPSec Setting …8-71
• LAN Interface Setup …8-71

Checking Host Name


Check the host name of the machine. Use the procedure below.

1 Press the System Menu key.

2 Press [System], [Next] of Network. Check the host name displayed under Host Name.

TCP/IP (IPv4) Setup


Set up TCP/IP to connect to the Windows network.

Refer to TCP/IP (IPv4) Setup (by Entering IP Addresses) on page 2-14 about the procedures.

TCP/IP (IPv6) Setup


Set up TCP/IP (IPv6) to connect to the network. The default settings are "TCP/IP Protocol: On, TCP/IP (IPv6):
Off. Use the procedure below.

1 Press the System Menu key.

2 Press [System], [Next] of Network and then [Next] of TCP/IP Setting.

3 Press [Change] of TCP/IP.

4 Press [On] and then press [OK].

5 Press [Next] of IPv6.

6 Press [Change] of IPv6.

7 Press [On]. IP Address (Link Local) appears.

8 Press [OK].

9 After changing the setting, restart the system or turn the machine OFF and then ON again.

For detailed information on restarting the system, refer to Restarting the System on page 8-63.

8-64
Default Setting (System Menu)

Manual Setting (IPv6)

Manually specify the IP address, prefix length, and gateway address of TCP/IP (IPv6). The manual setting is
available when selecting [On] for TCP/IP (IPv6). Use the procedure below.

1 Press the System Menu key.

2 Press [System], [Next] of Network and then [Next] of TCP/IP Setting.

3 Press [Next] of IPv6.

4 Press [Next] of Manual Setting.

5 Press [IP Address (Manual)] to enter IP address. The format of the IPv6 address is a sequence of numbers
(128 bit in total) separated by colons, e.g. 2001:db8:3c4d:15::1a2c:1a1f.

6 Press [OK].

Press [# Keys] of Prefix Length (0 - 128) to enter the prefix length using the numeric keys.

7 Press [Default Gateway] to enter the default gateway.

8 Check that all the entries are correct and Press [OK].

9 After changing the setting, restart the system or turn the machine OFF and then ON again.

For detailed information on restarting the system, refer to Restarting the System on page 8-63. 8
RA (Stateless) Settings

Select whether or not to use RA (Stateless). The RA (Stateless) settings are available when selecting [On] for
TCP/IP (IPv6). The default setting is On. Use the procedure below.

1 Press the System Menu key.

2 Press [System], [Next] of Network and then [Next] of TCP/IP Setting.

3 Press [Next] of IPv6.

4 Press [Change] of RA(Stateless).

5 Press [On] or [Off] of RA (Stateless). When selecting [On], IP Address 1 to 5 (Stateless) appears.

6 Press [OK].

7 After changing the setting, restart the system or turn the machine OFF and then ON again.

For detailed information on restarting the system, refer to Restarting the System on page 8-63.

DHCP (IPv6) Settings

Select whether or not to use the DHCP (IPv6) server. The DHCP (IPv6) Settings are available when selecting
[On] for TCP/IP (IPv6). The default setting is On. Use the procedure below.

1 Press the System Menu key.

2 Press [System], [Next] of Network and then [Next] of TCP/IP Setting.

3 Press [Next] of IPv6.

4 Press [Change] of DHCP.

8-65
Default Setting (System Menu)

5 Press [On] or [Off] of DHCP. When selecting [On], IP Address (Stateful) appears.

6 Press [OK].

7 After changing the setting, restart the system or turn the machine OFF and then ON again.

For detailed information on restarting the system, refer to Restarting the System on page 8-63.

Protocol Detail
The table below lists the network related function settings. The network related functions are available when
TCP/IP is On.

Default Restarting the


Item Description
Setting System*

NetBEUI Selects whether or not to receive On Y


documents using NetBEUI.

LPD Select whether or not to receive On Y


documents using LPD as the network
protocol.

SMTP Select whether or not to send e-mail Off N


(E-mail TX) using SMTP.

POP3 Select whether or not to receive e-mail Off N


(E-mail RX) using POP3.

FTP Client Select whether or not to send On Y


(Transmission) documents using FTP. When selecting
[On], set the FTP Port Number. Use Port:21
the FTP default port 21.

FTP Server Select whether or not to receive On Y


(Reception) documents using FTP.

SMB Client Select whether or not to send On N


(Transmission) documents using SMB. When
selecting [On], set the SMB default
Port Number. Use the SMB default port Port:139
139. For Windows Vista, use 445.

i-FAX Select whether or not to use i-FAX. On N

LDAP Select whether or not to use LDAP. Off N

SNMP Select whether or not to communicate On Y


using SNMP.

SNMPv3 Select whether or not to communicate Off Y


using SNMPv3.

HTTP Select whether or not to communicate On Y


using HTTP.

8-66
Default Setting (System Menu)

Default Restarting the


Item Description
Setting System*

HTTPS Select whether or not to communicate On Y


using HTTPS.
SSL must be set to [On] in SSL
Setup on page 8-69.

IPP Select whether or not to communicate Off Y


using IPP. When selecting [On], set the
IPP default Port Number. Use the IPP Port:631
default port 631.

IPP over SSL Select whether or not to use IPP over Off Y
SSL.
SSL must be set to [On] in SSL
Setup on page 8-69.

Raw Port Select whether or not to receive On Y


documents using Raw Port.

* Y: The machine must be restarted after the setting is changed.


N: The machine does not need to be restarted after the setting is changed.

Use the procedure below. 8


The following procedure is an example for specifying the SMTP (E-mail TX) settings.

1 Press the System Menu key.

2 Press [System] and then [Next] of Network to display the network settings screen.

3 Display the item you want to set and press [Change] for that item.

In this example, press [Change] of SMTP (E-mail TX).

4 Press [On] or [Off].

5 Press [OK].

6 After changing the setting, restart the system or turn the machine OFF and then ON again.

For detailed information on restarting the system, refer to Restarting the System on page 8-63.

NetWare Setup
Select the NetWare network connection. After that, select frame types for NetWare network from Auto,
Ethernet-II, 802.3, 802.2, or SNAP. The default settings are "On, Frame Type: Auto".

Use the procedure below.

1 Press the System Menu key.

2 Press [System], [Next] of Network and then [Change] of NetWare.

3 Press [On].

4 Press the key for the frame type you want to use.

8-67
Default Setting (System Menu)

5 Press [OK].

6 After changing the setting, restart the system or turn the machine OFF and then ON again.

For detailed information on restarting the system, refer to Restarting the System on page 8-63.

AppleTalk Setup
Select the Apple Talk network connection.

Refer to AppleTalk Setup on page 2-16 about the procedures.

WSD Scan Setup


Select whether or not to use WSD Scan. The default setting is On. Use the procedure below.

1 Press the System Menu key.

2 Press [System], [Next] of Network and then [Change] of WSD Scan.

3 Press [On] or [Off].

4 Press [OK].

5 After changing the setting, restart the system or turn the machine OFF and then ON again.

For detailed information on restarting the system, refer to Restarting the System on page 8-63.

WSD Print Setup


Select whether or not to use WSD Print. The default setting is On. Use the procedure below.

1 Press the System Menu key.

2 Press [System], [Next] of Network and then [Change] of WSD Print.

3 Press [On] or [Off].

4 Press [OK].

5 After changing the setting, restart the system or turn the machine OFF and then ON again.

For detailed information on restarting the system, refer to Restarting the System on page 8-63.

8-68
Default Setting (System Menu)

Secure Protocol
Encrypt the communication between your PC and the machine using the SSL encryption. After changing the
setting, restart the system or turn the machine OFF and then ON again. For detailed information on restarting
the system, refer to Restarting the System on page 8-63.

The following Secure Protocol settings are available.

• SSL Setup …8-69


• IPP Security Setup …8-69
• HTTP Security Setup …8-69
• LDAP Security Setup …8-70

SSL Setup
Select whether or not to use SSL. The default setting is On. Use the procedure below.

1 Press the System Menu key.

2 Press [System], [Next] of Network, [Next] of Secure Protocol, and then [Next] of SSL.

3 Press [On] or [Off].

4 Press [OK]. 8
5 After changing the setting, restart the system or turn the machine OFF and then ON again.

For detailed information on restarting the system, refer to Restarting the System on page 8-63.

IPP Security Setup


Select the IPP security level. This setup is available wh